Latest Releases | Adoptium
java.com/download/
Instruction Book for MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC models including: AE-200A Air Conditioning Control System Centralized Controller, AE-200A, Air Conditioning Control System Centralized Controller, Conditioning Control System Centralized Controller, Control System Centralized Controller, System Centralized Controller, Centralized Controller
File Info : application/pdf, 248 Pages, 20.21MB
DocumentDocument<ORIGINAL>
Air Conditioning Control System
Centralized Controller
AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A
AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E
Instruction Book
Integrated Centralized Control Web
Contents
Chapter 1. General descriptions.............................................5 1. Before use ..................................................................................5 2. Setting the Operating Environment .......................................... 11 3. Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web .............23 4. Name Display ...........................................................................27
Chapter 2. For building managers ........................................29 1. Home screen ............................................................................29 2. Usage .......................................................................................33
Chapter 3. For tenant managers ........................................137 1. Usage .....................................................................................139
Chapter 4. For general users..............................................189 1. Usage (PC, tablet)..................................................................191 2. Usage (Smartphone) ..............................................................213
Chapter 5. Troubleshooting ................................................225
Appendix: Added functions ..................................................243
Before using the controller, please read this Instruction Book carefully to ensure proper operation. Retain this manual for future reference.
Contents
Chapter 1. General descriptions ................................................................. 5 1. Before use ......................................................................................................... 5
1-1. Introduction ........................................................................................................... 5 1-2. Terms Used in This Manual................................................................................... 5 1-3. Main Features ....................................................................................................... 6 1-4. Operating environment........................................................................................ 10 2. Setting the Operating Environment ................................................................. 11 2-1. License................................................................................................................ 11 2-2. System Settings .................................................................................................. 12 2-3. Network settings.................................................................................................. 14 2-4. Setting the computer to be used for monitoring ................................................. 17 3. Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web..................................... 23 3-1. Logging in from the PC/tablet.............................................................................. 23 3-2. Logging in from the smartphone ......................................................................... 26 4. Name Display .................................................................................................. 27
Chapter 2. For building managers ............................................................ 29 1. Home screen ................................................................................................... 29 2. Usage .............................................................................................................. 33
2-1. Monitoring/Operation........................................................................................... 33 2-1-1. Screen sequence ...................................................................................... 33 2-1-2. Group icons............................................................................................... 35 2-1-3. Monitoring the operation status................................................................. 37 2-1-4. Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated...................................... 47 2-1-5. Advanced settings ..................................................................................... 53 2-1-6. Resetting the cumulative filter usage time ................................................ 63 2-1-7. Operation suspension function.................................................................. 64
2-2. Energy management........................................................................................... 66 2-2-1. Energy Use Status .................................................................................... 66 2-2-2. Ranking ..................................................................................................... 77 2-2-3. Target Value .............................................................................................. 81 2-2-4. Peak Cut ................................................................................................... 83
2-3. Schedule ............................................................................................................. 85 2-3-1. Schedule setting example ......................................................................... 85 2-3-2. Scheduled Start......................................................................................... 87 2-3-3. Weekly Schedule....................................................................................... 89 2-3-4. Annual Schedule ....................................................................................... 95 2-3-5. Today's Schedule ...................................................................................... 97 2-3-6. Copying existing settings, or creating a schedule based on other settings...................................................................................................... 98
WT07996X12
2
2-4. Notice ................................................................................................................ 101 2-4-1. Error List.................................................................................................. 101 2-4-2. Unit error log ........................................................................................... 102 2-4-3. Communication error log......................................................................... 103 2-4-4. Filter sign................................................................................................. 104
2-5. Settings ............................................................................................................. 105 2-5-1. Screen display settings ........................................................................... 105 2-5-2. User registration...................................................................................... 109 2-5-3. Initial settings .......................................................................................... 114
2-6. Function settings ............................................................................................... 115 2-7. Ventilation settings ............................................................................................ 115 2-8. Maintenance...................................................................................................... 116
2-8-1. Send Mail Log ......................................................................................... 117 2-8-2. Monitoring Status .................................................................................... 118 2-8-3. Gas Refrigerant Amount Check .............................................................. 120 2-8-4. CSV Output ............................................................................................. 123 2-8-5. Back up/import settings data................................................................... 134 2-8-6. Initialize Learning Data for AI-Smart Start............................................... 136
Chapter 3. For tenant managers ............................................................. 137 1. Usage ............................................................................................................ 139
1-1. Monitor/Operation ............................................................................................. 139 1-1-1. Screen sequence .................................................................................... 139 1-1-2. Group icons............................................................................................. 140 1-1-3. Monitoring the operation status............................................................... 142 1-1-4. Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated.................................... 146 1-1-5. Advanced settings ................................................................................... 151 1-1-6. Operation suspension function................................................................ 160
1-2. Energy management......................................................................................... 161 1-2-1. Energy Use Status .................................................................................. 161 1-2-2. Ranking ................................................................................................... 169 1-2-3. Target Value ............................................................................................ 173
1-3. Schedule ........................................................................................................... 175 1-3-1. Schedule setting example ....................................................................... 175 1-3-2. Scheduled Start....................................................................................... 177 1-3-3. Weekly Schedule..................................................................................... 179 1-3-4. Annual Schedule ..................................................................................... 184 1-3-5. Today's Schedule .................................................................................... 186 1-3-6. Copying existing settings, or creating a schedule based on other settings.................................................................................................... 187
WT07996X12
3
Chapter 4. For general users................................................................... 189 1. Usage (PC, tablet) ......................................................................................... 191
1-1. Monitor/Operation ............................................................................................. 191 1-1-1. Screen sequence .................................................................................... 191 1-1-2. Group icons............................................................................................. 192 1-1-3. Monitoring the operation status............................................................... 194 1-1-4. Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated.................................... 198 1-1-5. Advanced settings ................................................................................... 203 1-1-6. Operation suspension function................................................................ 212
2. Usage (Smartphone) ..................................................................................... 213 2-1. Monitoring the operation status......................................................................... 213 2-1-1. Checking the operation status................................................................. 213 2-1-2. Group icons............................................................................................. 214 2-1-3. Operation mode ...................................................................................... 214 2-1-4. Status display.......................................................................................... 215 2-2. Operation .......................................................................................................... 216 2-2-1. Operating the units.................................................................................. 216 2-2-2. Operating the units in all groups ............................................................. 223 2-2-3. Operation suspension function................................................................ 224
Chapter 5. Troubleshooting..................................................................... 225 1. HTTPS (SSL) connection .............................................................................. 227
1-1. When using a Windows PC............................................................................... 227 1-2. When using an iOS device (Safari) ................................................................... 231 1-3. When using an Android device (Chrome) ......................................................... 233 2. When the layout is broken ............................................................................. 235 2-1. When using a Windows PC (Chrome) .............................................................. 235 2-2. When using an iOS device (Safari) ................................................................... 236 2-3. When using an Android device (Chrome) ......................................................... 236 3. Login screen does not open .......................................................................... 237 3-1. Checking the login destination IP address ........................................................ 237 3-2. Mismatched software versions.......................................................................... 238 3-3. When the settings for the Integrated Centralized Control Web have not
been made ....................................................................................................... 238 4. Air conditioning units that can be monitored and operated are not
displayed ....................................................................................................... 239 4-1. Communication error occurred.......................................................................... 239 4-2. Integrated Centralized Control settings are not set correctly ............................ 240 5. Screen displayed with bottom part cut off on a tablet .................................... 241
Appendix: Added functions...................................................................... 243
WT07996X12
4
General descriptions Chapter 1
Chapter 1. General descriptions
1. Before use
1-1. Introduction
This Instruction Book explains how to monitor and operate the units connected to the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A and AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E using a Web browser. For initial settings and function settings, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings).
1-2. Terms Used in This Manual
- "Centralized Controller AE-200A/AE-200E" is referred to as "AE-200." - "Centralized Controller AE-50A/AE-50E" is referred to as "AE-50." - "Centralized Controller EW-50A/EW-50E" is referred to as "EW-50." - "Booster unit" and "Water HEX unit" are referred to as "Air To Water (PWFY) unit." - "Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER" is referred to as "AHC." - "Hot Water Heat Pump unit" is referred to as "HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit." - "e-Series chiller unit (EAHV, EACV)" is referred to as "Chiller unit." - "Chiller unit of MEHITS" is referred to as "MEHT-CH&HP unit." - The display/operation items included in this manual may not be able to be displayed/operated depending on the
connected air conditioning unit models. - Screen images used in this manual are from Windows 10, and Google ChromeTM. - Screen images used in this manual are from the display that has a resolution of 1600 x 1200.
WT07996X12
5
1-3. Main Features
The main features of Integrated Centralized Control Web are as follows.
(1) Monitoring and operating air conditioning units
By using the Integrated Centralized Control Web, up to 2,000 air conditioning units connected to 40 AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 centralized controllers can be monitored and operated. On the AE-200's LCD, up to 200 air conditioning units can be monitored and operated, and the air conditioning units connected to all centralized controllers within the Integrated Centralized Control Web can be integrated and managed. Visibility is improved and management work is substantially reduced as the air conditioning units can be displayed anywhere on a floor layout by configuring the Floor Layout settings. Furthermore, intuitive operation is possible.
Note: "Integrated Centralized Control Web" license is required to use the Integrated Centralized Control Web that spans multiple AE-200E or EW-50E systems. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only) AE-200, AE-50, and EW-50 require separate license registration.
Note: They must all be the same version.
Management range of Integrated Centralized Control Web
Management range of AE-200's LCD
AE-200's LCD By connecting up to 4 AE-50/EW-50 controllers to AE-200, up to 200 air conditioning units can be monitored and operated on the AE-200's LCD.
Integrated Centralized Control Web
By connecting 40 AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 controllers using the web browser, up to 2,000 air conditioning units can be monitored and operated on a screen.
(2) Large number of monitoring and operation terminals
If a centralized controller and wireless LAN router are connected, the air conditioning units can be monitored and operated using tablets and smartphones. General users can use smartphones in addition to PCs and tablets.
Building manager Tenant manager
User
General user
PC
Building manager
V
Tenant manager
V
General user
V
Tablet V V V
Smartphone V
Note: When using a tablet, lock the landscape orientation. If the screen rotates to portrait, the layout may break. If this is the case, read the layout again.
Note: "Tenant/Personal Web" license is required to register tenant managers and general users.
WT07996X12
6
General descriptions Chapter 1
(3) User management function
In addition to a building manager that can manage all air conditioning units, you can set tenant managers that can manage specific air conditioning units and general users that can perform only monitoring and operation. Since the functions that can be used differ for each user, this facilitates user management that meets requirements.
Note: Up to 50 users can access the Integrated Centralized Control Web at the same time. While 50 users are accessing the Integrated Centralized Control Web, no more users can access the Integrated Centralized Control Web.
User Building manager Tenant manager General user
Number of users 1
200 2000
List of accessible functions for each user The available functions differ depending on the user that logs in.
Accessible functions for different users
V: Accessible function
Function
Building manager Tenant manager
Home
Operation status for each floor/ Electric energy consumption/Notice
V
Floor Layout
V
Show groups
V
V
Measurement Status
V
Monitor/Operation
AHC Status HWHP
V
V
V *1
Chiller
V
V
MEHT-CH&HP
V
V
Advanced settings
V
V
Energy Use Status
V
V
Energy Management Ranking Target Value
V
V
V
V
Peak Cut
V
Schedule settings
V
V
Schedule
Date range setting for Weekly schedule
V
Error List
V
Notice
Unit error log/Communication error log
V
Filter sign
V
Screen display settings
V
User registration
V
Date and time settings
V
License registration
V
E-Mail
V
Settings
Peak Cut
V
Set Temperature Range Limit
V
Night Mode Schedule
V
External Temperature Interlock
V
Night Setback Control
V
Night purge setting
V
Send Mail Log
V
Outdoor Unit Status
V
Free Contact
V
Maintenance
Gas Refrigerant Amount Check
V
CSV Output
V
Utility
V
Initialize Learning Data for AI Start
V
*1 QAHV units cannot be monitored or operated. *2 Chiller units, MEHT-CH&HP units, and HWHP units cannot be monitored or operated on the smartphone. *3 Refer to the Instruction Book (Web Browser for Initial Settings) for the items on a gray background.
General user
V V *1*2 V *2 V *2 V
WT07996X12
7
Sample user setting The air conditioning unit groups to be managed can be set for each user as shown in the figure below.
Building manager Tenant manager General user
Building owner Company A, Company B, Company C
Administration Department, Sales Department, Accounting Department, Development Department
AE-200
Building owner (Building manager)
Company A (Tenant manager)
Administration Dept. (General user)
Sales Dept. (General user)
AE-50/EW-50
Company B (Tenant manager)
Accounting Dept. (General user)
Company C (Tenant manager)
AE-50/EW-50
Development Dept. (General user)
WT07996X12
8
General descriptions Chapter 1
(4) Energy management function The energy-control-related status, such as electric energy consumption, operation time, and outdoor temperature, can be displayed in a graph. This allows you to consider and check the energy-saving measures as you can grasp the current operating status and check the energy saving effect. Also, ease of maintenance can be improved by grasping air conditioning unit conditions such as abnormal electricity consumption.
(5) Schedule function Scheduled operation is possible by setting the operation, stop, and other times of the air conditioning units. You can set Weekly Schedule to set each day of the week and Annual Schedule to set specific days such as national holidays. Furthermore, you can change the schedule settings of just the day.
WT07996X12
9
1-4. Operating environment
The list below shows the OS, browsers, and models of the computers, tablets, and smartphone that have been verified to be compatible with the Integrated Centralized Control Web. The use of the latest version of OS and browser is recommended.
Item
Requirement
CPU
1 GHz or faster (2 GHz or faster recommended)
Memory
2 GB or more
Screen resolution
1024 x 768 or higher (1920 x 1080 recommended)
OS/Java ® execution environment
· Microsoft ® Windows ® 11 (64 bit) *1 · Microsoft ® Windows ® 10 (64 bit) *1 · Microsoft ® Windows ® 8.1 (64 bit) *1 · Mac OS ® Mojave 10.14 (Only CSV File Download Tool is not guaranteed to work.)
* Java ® execution environment (Oracle ® Java or AdoptOpenJDK) is required. Verified to work properly on Oracle ® Java SE 8, Java 8 (https://www.java.com/download/) and
Adoptium Temurin11 (https://adoptium.net/?variant=openjdk11&jvmVariant=hotspot).
* The version of the Oracle ® Java can be verified by clicking [Java] in the Control Panel.
PC
Adoptim Temurin11 version information is available from the Programs and Functions of
the Control Panel.
System requirements
Minimum system requirements for Windows ® 8.1, Windows ® 10, or Windows ® 11 must be met.
· Microsoft ® Edge ® 96
Browser Microsoft ® Excel ®
· Google ChromeTM Ver. 96 · Safari ® 15
· Microsoft ® Excel ® 2013 (32 bit)/2016 (32 bit)/2019 (32 bit)
Built-in LAN port or LAN card
100BASE-TX or higher
Pointing device
Mouse, etc.
USB
Minimum 1 port
Smartphone Tablet
Browser Safari ® 15
Google ChromeTM Ver. 96 Safari ® 15
Model
· iPhone 13 Pro (iOS 15) · iPhone SE (iOS 15) · Pixel 6 (AndroidTM 12) · Galaxy SC-04J (AndroidTM 8.0)
· iPad Air 2 (iOS 15)
*1) Verified to work on the Pro edition Note: Use a browser other than Microsoft ® Internet Explore ® because Microsoft Corporation will end the support for Microsoft ® Internet
Explorer ® 11 in June 2022, and also because the use of IE is known to be associated with the case explained in item No. 13 in Chapter 5 "Troubleshooting". Note: Note that the application may not work properly when using a browser other than the ones listed above. Note: When leaving the Integrated Centralized Control Web running all the time, use an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with the computer. Note: Registered trademarks
· Android is a registered trademark of Google LLC. in the U.S. and other countries. · Apple is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · Google is a registered trademark of Google LLC. · Google Chrome is a registered trademark of Google LLC. in the U.S. and other countries. · Edge is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. · Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. · The official name of Internet Explorer is "Microsoft ® Internet Explorer Internet browser". · iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license. · iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · Microsoft Office Excel is a product name of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. · Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. · The official name of Windows is "Microsoft ® Windows ® Operating System". · Safari is a trademark or registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the U.S. · Nexus is a registered trademark of Google LLC. in the U.S. and other countries. · Pixel is a trademark of Google LLC. · Galaxy is a trademark or registered trademark of Samsun Co., Ltd. Note: Company name or product name that is described in this manual may be a trademark or a registered trademark of each company.
WT07996X12
10
General descriptions Chapter 1
2. Setting the Operating Environment
This Integrated Centralized Control Web can be connected to multiple centralized controllers to operate and monitor air conditioning unit groups. This section explains the settings for the condition monitoring and operating of air conditioning units with Integrated Centralized Control Web. Use a VPN when using an Internet. Refer to section "Setting remote monitoring function" in the Technical Manual for the setting method.
2-1. License
A license may be required for this Integrated Centralized Control Web depending on the scope of integrated management. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only) If you wish to manage the centralized controllers of two or more systems with Integrated Centralized Control Web, an "Integrated Centralized Control Web" license is required.
License
Management scope
Maximum number of air conditioning units to be managed
Not registered
1 system
200 *1
Registered
2 or more systems
2000
*1 50 units when using a single EW-50. Note: License registration enables up to 40 centralized controllers to be managed. Note: One system is a set of equipment consisting of one AE-200 and up to four expansion controllers, and a group of 200 air conditioning units can be connected to one system. When using a single EW-50, the EW-50 counts as one system. Note: When the license is not registered, the number of air conditioning units that can be managed when using a single EW-50 is 50.
License registered
Can perform integrated management of the centralized controllers of two or more systems.
License not registered
Can be used with Integrated Centralized Control Web for each system.
System 1
Air conditioning units that are connected all AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 controllers can be managed with Integrated Centralized Control Web.
System 2 System 3 System 40 (maximum) *2
*2 When using EW-50 for all systems
WT07996X12
Can be managed using Integrated Centralized Control Web for each system.
11
2-2. System Settings
To use Integrated Centralized Control Web, you need to configure the settings using Initial Setting Tool. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Important When using Initial Setting Tool, be sure to configure the settings as described in the procedures of Instruction Book (Initial
Settings). When not using Initial Setting Tool, only the indoor/outdoor units that are under the control of the login destination centralized
controller can be monitored and operated.
[1] Settings of the centralized controllers to be managed with Integrated Centralized Control Web Use Initial Setting Tool to configure the settings of the centralized controllers to be managed with Integrated Centralized Control Web.
(1) In [Basic Settings] > [System Configuration] of Initial Setting Tool, specify the IP address of each centralized controller to be managed with Integrated Centralized Control Web.
(2) In [Floor Settings] > [Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web], set the login destination centralized controller (target centralized controller) of Integrated Centralized Control Web and the management target centralized controllers (managed centralized controllers).
Login
Target centralized controller setting Set the centralized controller to be logged in to with Integrated Centralized Control Web.
WT07996X12
Managed centralized controller setting Set the centralized controllers to be managed with Integrated Centralized Control Web.
12
General descriptions Chapter 1
Note: When connecting an AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 to an existing LAN, consult the system administrator to decide the IP addresses. Note: When using an AE-200/AE-50/EW-50-dedicated LAN, it is recommended that the AE-200 unit and the EW-50 unit (only when
used alone) be assigned an IP address between the range [192.168.1.1] and [192.168.1.40], and the expansion controller AE-50/EW-50 unit be assigned an IP address between the range [192.168.1.211] and [192.168.1.249].
[2] Floor settings Use Initial Setting Tool to configure the floor settings of Integrated Centralized Control Web. The configured settings are displayed in Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Setting image 1
Setting image 2
Procedure 1 Make settings of floors and floor names on the "Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web" setting screen.
Procedure 2 Make settings of floor layouts and icon locations on the "Floor Layout for Integrated Centralized Control Web" setting screen.
(1) In [Floor Settings] > [Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web] of Initial Setting Tool, set the floor names and floor number configuration displayed on the home screen of Integrated Centralized Control Web.
(2) In [Floor Settings] > [Floor Layout for Integrated Centralized Control Web], set the floor layout diagram and icon locations.
WT07996X12
13
2-3. Network settings
[1] Setting the IP address of the PC Follow the instructions below to set the PC's IP address to connect the Integrated Centralized Control Web and multiple centralized controllers. The PC's IP address must have the same network address as the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50's IP address.
(1) Open the control panel. Windows ® 8.1 Start screen>[Desktop]>[My computer]>[Control panel] Windows ® 10 or 11 Search for the control panel using the search box.
(2) Click [Network and Sharing Center]>[Change adapter settings]. Double-click the [Ethernet] icon. In the [Ethernet status] window, click [Properties].
(3) Click [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] to select it, and click [Properties].
(4) In the [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties] window, check the radio button next to [Use the following IP address]. Enter the PC's IP address (e.g., [192.168.1.101]) in the [IP address] field, and enter the subnet mask [255.255.255.0] (unless otherwise specified) in the [Subnet mask] field. In the [Default gateway] field, enter the gateway address as necessary.
Note: Consult the system administrator to decide the IP, subnet mask, and gateway addresses.
Note: Take a note of the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway before making changes.
(5) Keep clicking [OK] or [Close] to close all windows.
WT07996X12
14
General descriptions Chapter 1
[2] Setting the wireless LAN router When connecting a tablet, you need to configure the wireless LAN router settings. Set the LAN-side IP address of the wireless LAN router to a network address of the same system as the IP address of the centralized controller AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
<Example> LAN-side IP address setting 192.168.1.100
LAN1: 192.168.1.1 Important For details on how to set the IP address of the wireless LAN router, refer to the Instruction Book of your wireless LAN router.
WT07996X12
15
[3] Setting the IP address of the tablet and smartphone When using this Integrated Centralized Control Web with a tablet or smartphone, you need to set the IP address of the tablet or smartphone. Here we describe the example of using an Apple iPad. (1) Select the [Settings] icon on the home screen.
(2) Select the [Wi-Fi] menu in the [Settings] screen and then turn on the Wi-Fi setting. Select the SSID of the wireless LAN router you wish to connect to from the [CHOOSE A NETWORK...] list and then connect.
(3) Open the [Static] tab and configure the IP address settings of the tablet.
Important Consult the system administrator to decide the IP address, subnet mask, and DNS. Set the IP address of the tablet and smartphone so that it does not duplicate the IP address of a centralized controller. We recommend setting a static IP address for the IP address of the tablet or smartphone.
Note: The tablet or smartphone cannot be connected to the external Internet when connected to the wireless LAN router for Integrated Centralized Control Web.
WT07996X12
16
General descriptions Chapter 1
2-4. Setting the computer to be used for monitoring
[1] Disabling the sleep function Disable the sleep setting on your computer. If the computer goes into sleep, the monitoring and operation functions of the Integrated Centralized Control Web will not work. When using a mobile computer, keep it plugged into an AC power source. (1) From the Start menu, click [Settings] to open the
[Windows Settings] window.
(2) Click [System].
(3) Click [Power & sleep]. ([Power & Battery] on Windows 11)
WT07996X12
17
(4) In the pulldown under [When plugged in, PC goes to sleep after] under [Sleep], select [Never]. ([Screen & Sleep] on Windows 11)
(5) In the pulldown under [When plugged in, turn off after] under [Screen], select [Never]. ([Screen & Sleep] on Windows 11)
(6) Click [Additional power settings] to open the [Power Options] window. (Enter [Control panel] in the search box, and click [Power options] on Windows 11.)
(7) Click [Choose what the power buttons do] to open the [System Settings] window.
WT07996X12
18
General descriptions Chapter 1
(8) In the [Power buttons and lid settings] menu, select [Do nothing] for all items, and click [Save changes].
(9) Close the [Power Options] window. (10) Close the [Settings] window. [2] Disabling the sleep tab for Microsoft Edge The sleeping tab function was added to Microsoft Edge in version 88. This function makes the tabs that have not been accessed for a preset time go into sleep to save the memory space when multiple tabs are open. When the tab goes into sleep, the monitoring and operation functions of the Integrated Centralized Control Web will not work. Disable the sleep tab function of the Microsoft Edge. When using a mobile computer, keep it plugged into an AC power source. (1) Click [···] on the top right corner of the Microsoft
Edge window. Select [Settings] to open the [Settings] window.
WT07996X12
19
(2) Click [System].
(3) Click off (white) the switch next to [Save resources with sleeping tabs] under [Optimize Performance].
(4) Close the [Settings] window. [3] Disabling the screen saver Disable the screen saver on your computer. If the computer goes into the screen saver mode, the monitoring and operation functions of the Integrated Centralized Control Web will not work. (1) From the Start menu, click [Settings] to open the
[Windows Settings] window.
WT07996X12
20
General descriptions Chapter 1
(2) Click [Personalization]. (3) Click [Lock screen]. (4) Click [Screen saver settings].
WT07996X12
21
(5) Select [(None)] in the pulldown under [Screen saver], and then click [OK].
(6) Close the [Settings] window. [4] Rebooting the computer for monitoring (recommended) · If the Integrated Centralized Control Web is left running at all times, periodically restart it. (Approximately once a
week) · To ensure stable operation of the Integrated Centralized Control Web, it is recommended to reboot the computer
for monitoring once a month.
WT07996X12
22
General descriptions Chapter 1
3. Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web
3-1. Logging in from the PC/tablet
(1) Enter the web page address in the address field of the Web browser as follows: http://[IP address of the login destination AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html
(2) A login screen will appear. Model name, serial number, and software version information of the login destination AE-200/EW-50 will appear on Ver. 7.98 and later.
Model name Serial number
Software version
Note: If the IP address of the AE-200/EW-50 is [192.168.1.1], the web page address is [http: //192.168.1.1/control/index.html]. Note: Use an Initial Setting Tool to configure the login destination centralized controller settings. Note: The web page will be displayed in the same language as the operating system on the PC.
The web page can be displayed in other languages by entering the web page address as follows:
Chinese English French German Italian Japanese Portuguese Russian Spanish Turkish
http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?zh http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?en http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?fr http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?de http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?it http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?ja http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?pt http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?ru http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?es http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html?tr
Note: You can add the web page address to your Favorites on the login screen for easy access in the future.
Note: When using the Integrated Centralized Control Web on a tablet, depending on the tablet used, the bottom of the operation screen may be cut off. In the event of this, create a shortcut on the Home screen from which to start the application. Refer to 5 "Screen displayed with bottom part cut off on a tablet" in Chapter 5 for details on how to add a shortcut to the Home screen.
Note: Depending on the PC display used, the bottom of the operation screen may be cut off. In the event of this, switch the browser to full screen mode.
WT07996X12
23
(3) Enter the user name and the password in the login screen, and click [Login]. A screen that shows the operation status of the air conditioning units will appear. The table below shows the functions that are available for building managers, tenant managers, and general users.
User
Terminal
Available functions
Home
· Brief display of all floors · Display of electric energy consumption · Display of error status
Monitor/ Operation
· Display of floor layouts and monitoring/operating the operation status on the group list · Display of measurement status · Display of AHC status · Monitoring/operating the HWHP operation status · Monitoring/operating the chiller unit operation status · Monitoring/operating the MEHT-CH&HP unit operation status
Building manager
· PC · Tablet
Tenant manager
General user
· PC · Tablet · Smartphone
Energy Management Schedule Notice
Settings
Maintenance
Monitor/ Operation Energy Management Schedule Monitor/ Operation
· Energy use status · Ranking · Monitoring target values · Peak Cut Control status
· Changing today's schedule · Weekly schedule setting 15 · Annual schedule setting · Date range setting for weekly schedule
· Display of units in error · Display of unit error log · Display of communication error · Display of filter sign
· Screen display setting · User registration · Current time setting · License registration · E-Mail · Peak Cut · Set Temperature Range Limit · Night Mode Schedule · External Temperature Interlock · Night Setback Control · Night purge setting
· Error notification e-mail log · Monitoring outdoor unit operation status · Monitoring indoor unit free contact · Gas Refrigerant Amount Check · CSV output (only PC) · Utility · Initialize Learning Data for AI Start
· Monitoring/operating the operation status on the group list · Monitoring/operating the HWHP operation status · Monitoring/operating the chiller unit operation status · Monitoring/operating the MEHT-CH&HP unit operation status
· Energy use status · Ranking · Monitoring target values
· Changing today's schedule · Weekly schedule setting 15 · Annual schedule setting
· Monitoring/operating the operation status · Monitoring/operating the HWHP operation status (excluding smartphone) · Monitoring/operating the chiller unit operation status (excluding smartphone) · Monitoring/operating the MEHT-CH&HP unit operation status (excluding smartphone)
WT07996X12
24
General descriptions Chapter 1
The tables below show the default user names and passwords for building manager. There are no default user names or passwords for the tenant managers or general users.
Note: Tenant managers and general users are not registered at the time of shipment. Up to 200 tenant managers and 2,000 general users can be registered. You can log in with building manager privileges and then use the user management function to set the air conditioning unit groups that can be monitored and operated by each user. Refer to 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2 for details.
Note: The user name and password used for the Integrated Centralized Control Web are different from the ones used for the LCD.
Note: It is recommended to change the default user name and password so that the users other than the building managers will not be able to change the settings. Refer to 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2 for how to change the default user name and password. Write down the user name and the password, and keep them in the safe place. If you forget your user name or the password, contact your dealer.
Note: If the default user name and password of building manager were changed, the changed user name and the password will remain active after the controller is updated to a newer version. Also, if you import the backup data of the changed settings to another AE-200/EW-50, the changed user name and the password will remain active.
AE-200E/EW-50E (All versions)
User
Default user name
Building manager administrator
Default password admin
AE-200A/EW-50A (Ver. 7.97 and earlier)
User
Default user name
Building manager administrator
Default password admin
AE-200A/EW-50A (Ver. 7.98 and later)
User
Default user name
Building manager
administrator
Default password*1*2 ad "Serial number"
Example default password (Serial number: 19672-123*3)
ad19672123
*1 Default password for AE-200A/EW-50A updated to Ver. 7.98 or later from Ver. 7.97 or earlier The default password varies with the version immediately before the update. Default password for AE-200A/EW-50A when updated from a version earlier than Ver. 7.98
Version before the update Ver. 7.107.12 Ver. 7.237.97
Default password after the system has been updated to Ver. 7.98 or later ad "Serial number" admin
*2 Default password for AE-200A/EW-50A to which the backup data from Ver. 7.98 or later was imported If the settings data are backed up from the AE-200A/EW-50A that was logged in with the default password and are imported to the AE-200A/EW-50A Ver. 7.98 or later, the new password will be the serial number of the AE-200A/EW-50A to which the data was imported.
AE-200A/EW-50A Software version: 7.98 Serial number: 31C71-101 Password of building manager: ad31C71101
AE-200A/EW-50A Software version: 7.98 Serial number: 19272-124 Password of building manager: ad19272124
Export backup data
USB
Import backup data
*3 On Ver. 7.98 and later, serial number can be found on the login screen of the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Refer to section 3-1 "Logging in from the PC/tablet".
WT07996X12
25
3-2. Logging in from the smartphone
Note: Be sure to use a smartphone in portrait mode. Note: No user names and passwords are registered at the time of shipment, so you need to log in with building manager privileges and
register the users.
(1) Enter the web page address in the address field of the Web browser as follows: http://[IP address of the login destination AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html
(2) A login screen will appear.
Note: Use an Initial Setting Tool to configure the login destination centralized controller settings. Note: Only general users can log in. Note: If the IP address of the AE-200/EW-50 is [192.168.1.1], the web page address is [http: //192.168.1.1/mobile/index.html]. Note: The web page will be displayed in the same language as the operating system on the smartphone.
The web page can be displayed in other languages by entering the web page address as follows:
Chinese English French German Italian Japanese Portuguese Russian Spanish Turkish
http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?zh http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?en http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?fr http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?de http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?it http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?ja http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?pt http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?ru http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?es http://[IP address of AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html?tr
Note: You can add the web page address to your Favorites on the login screen for easy access in the future.
(3) Enter the user name and the password in the login screen, and click [Login]. A screen that shows the operation status of the air conditioning units will appear. The table below shows the functions that are available for general users. The user name or the password has not been registered at factory shipment. Log in as the administrator as explained in Section 3-1 "Logging in from the PC/tablet", and register the user name and the password. Groups of air-conditioning unit groups that are monitorable/operable by different users can be set by using the user management function. Refer to 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2 for details.
User
General user
Terminal
Default user name
· Smartphone
--
Default password
--
Monitor/ Operation
Available functions · Monitoring/operating the operation status
Note: The user name and password of a general user is the same as for a PC or tablet.
WT07996X12
26
General descriptions Chapter 1
4. Name Display
The names of air conditioning units can be displayed in this Integrated Centralized Control Web. If the name settings are not set, names are displayed in accordance with the following rules.
Note: For how to set the names of groups, blocks, and energy management blocks, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings). Note: The numbering system of centralized controllers and expansion controllers becomes the numbers registered in "Initial
Setting Tool Basic Settings System Configuration" in the Instruction Book (Initial Settings). Note: EW-50 is displayed as "AE**" on the Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Login destination centralized controller (system 1)
System 01-1
Energy management block 01-001
Block 01-1
Block 01-2
AE01
Address
Expansion controller
01-055
(1st) of the login
Metering device 2
destination centralized
01-2
controller (system 1)
Group Group
01-1
01-2
Block 01-1-1
Group 01-3
Group 01-4
Contact 2
Address 01-050-2
AE01-1
Address Group
01-1-051
01-1-1
Metering device 1 01-1-1
Management target centralized controller
Block 02-50
(system 2)
Group 01-1-2
Group 01-1-3
Group 01-1-4
Contact 2
Address 01-1-048-2
Energy management block 02-200
AHC
AE02
Address Group
02-051
02-50
Contact 1
Address 02-201-1
System 01-1-1
Name display in Integrated Centralized Control Web when the name settings are not set
Target Centralized controller Energy management block
Block
Group
No.
Description
Name
Login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Expansion controller (1st) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
AE01 (AE No.) AE01-1 (AE No.)
Management target centralized controller (system 2)
AE02 (AE No.)
Energy management block (Block No. 1) of the login destination Energy management
centralized controller (system 1)
block 01-001
Energy management block (Block No. 200) of the login destination centralized controller (system 2)
Energy management block 02-200
Block (Block No. 1) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Block 01-1
Block (Block No. 1) of the expansion controller (1st) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Block 01-1-1
Block (Block No. 1) of the management target centralized controller (system 2)
Block 02-50
Group (Group No. 1) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Group 01-1
Group (Group No. 1) of the expansion controller (1st) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Group 01-1-1
Group (Group No. 50) of the management target centralized controller (system 2)
Group 02-50
WT07996X12
27
Target
Address
Metering device (Pulse input) QAHV unit
No.
Description
Name
Address (Address No. 55) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Address 01-055
Address (Address No. 51) of the expansion controller (1st) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Address 01-1-051
Contact number (Contact No. 2) of the Address (Address No. 50) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Address 01-050-2
Contact number (Contact No. 2) of the Address (Address No.
48) of the expansion controller (1st) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Address 01-1-048-2
Contact number (Contact No. 1) of the Address (Address No. 201) of the management target centralized controller (system 2)
Address 02-201-1
Contact number (Contact No. 2) of the Pulse input of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Metering device 01-2
Contact number (Contact No. 1) of the Pulse input of the
expansion controller (1st) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
Metering device 01-1-1
QAHV system (QAHV system No. 1) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
System 01-1
QAHV system (QAHV system No. 2) of the login destination centralized controller (system 1)
System 01-1-1
WT07996X12
28
For building managers Chapter 2
Chapter 2. For building managers
When logged in with building manager privileges, all functions on the Integrated Centralized Control Web are available for use.
1. Home screen
Log into the AE-200 to display the Home screen. From here, it is possible to carry out monitoring, operation, and start various functions. When the "Initial display screen" setting is set to "Monitor/Operation," the Monitor/Operation screen will appear. Refer to section 2-5-1 "Screen display settings" in Chapter 2 for settings methods.
Login URL: http://[IP address of the login destination centralized controller AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html
Note: For how to log in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web using a PC or tablet, refer to 3 "Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web" in Chapter 1.
Note: Login processing may require approximately 1 minute. Also, switching between pages sometimes takes approximately 3 seconds. More time may be required, depending on your communications environment, terminal functionality, and the number of devices in the managed air conditioning unit group.
[1] Menu
[3] This year's electric energy consumption
[4] Notice
[6] Current date and time
[1] Menu
[2] Monitor/Operation
[5] Entire building
[7] Error notification
Home
Displays a Home screen.
Monitor/Operation
Displays a screen to monitor and operate the operation conditions of each unit group.
Energy Management Displays the energy use status of each unit group.
Schedule Notice Settings
Sets the schedule operations for each unit group.
Displays error status that are occurring in a system. Indicates the number of errors on the button.
Sets the settings such as screen display and user management.
WT07996X12
Maintenance
Displays and sets the maintenance information of unit groups. 29
[2] Monitor/Operation This simply displays the operation status of the unit groups in the system. It allows you to quickly grasp the operation, stopped, and error occurrence status on each floor.
All units on the 21st to 30th floors are stopped. (Gray)
One or more units on the 11th to 20th floors are in operation.
(Green)
One or more units on the 1st to 10th floors are in error. (Red)
One or more units on the floor are in operation. (Green)
All units on the floor are stopped. (Gray)
One or more units on the floor are in error. (Red)
[3] This year's electric energy consumption This displays the electric energy consumption and outdoor temperature for all unit groups in the system. Clicking the graph changes the screen to "Energy Use Status" of the "Energy Management" menu.
Outdoor temperature
Electric energy consumption
Note: The outdoor temperature will appear only when the temperature sensor to measure the outdoor temperature is set in the Energy Management settings for the login destination centralized controller. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
Note: "Yearly," "Monthly," and "Daily" can be selected for the electric energy consumption displayed on the Home screen. Refer to section 2-5-1 "Screen display settings" for settings methods. The factory default setting is "Daily."
Note: When the target electric energy is set, the target electric energy is displayed only for "Yearly" and "Monthly".
Yearly
Monthly
Outdoor temperature
Outdoor temperature
Electric energy consumption
Target electric energy consumption
Electric energy consumption
Target electric energy consumption
WT07996X12
30
For building managers Chapter 2
[4] Notice This displays the errors of the units and centralized controllers in the system under the control of Integrated Centralized Control Web. Clicking this changes the screen to "Error list" of the "Notice" menu.
Number of errors of the units that are managed in the Integrated Centralized Control Web
Error code: Code No.
Group name
Address: Centralized controller No.Address No.
[5] Entire building This allows you to simultaneously operate all unit groups that are managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web.
[6] Current date and time This displays the time of the PC on which Integrated Centralized Control Web is used.
Note: Execution time of the scheduled tasks as well as time in history log files are executed and displayed as per the time on the centralized controller.
Note: Schedule setting and date selection/display for energy management are as per the time on the PC. Note: Ensure that the time on the Integrated Centralized Control Web and on the managed centralized controller match when using
the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Refer to 2-5-3 [1] "Date and Time Settings" in Chapter 2 for details on ensuring these match.
WT07996X12
31
[7] Error notification When an error occurs with the units and centralized controllers under the control of Integrated Centralized Control Web or when a communication error occurs with the centralized controller, the error can be notified with a buzzer sound and a popup message.
Note: The buzzer will not sound when the PC or tablet is in sleeping mode. It is recommended to deactivate the sleeping mode. Note: The buzzer will not sound when the speaker is muted on the PC or tablet. Note: This function is disabled by default. To enable this function, click [Screen display settings] under [Settings], and set the Error
warning setting to [ON]. Note: The setting for this function can be changed only when logged in with building manager privileges.
Error-notification popup
(1) To stop the buzzer
Click the [
] icon in the error-notification popup. The icon will change to [
(2) To check the details of the error notification
Click [Check]. The [Error List] window under the [Notice] menu will appear. This window contains detailed information about the error.
(3) To close the popup window Click [Close]. The popup [
] will disappear.
], and the buzzer will stop.
WT07996X12
32
2. Usage
This section explains how to monitor and operate the air conditioning units, LOSSNAY units, Air To Water (PWFY) units, HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) units, chiller units, MEHT-CH&HP units, and general equipment that are connected to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50, and to check the measurement data, malfunctioning units, units whose filter sign is triggered, and AHC status.
2-1. Monitoring/Operation
2-1-1. Screen sequence
Home
Home (preview)
For building managers Chapter 2
Floor Layout
Floor Layout (simple operation)
Advanced settings
Group list
Group list (simple operation)
Measurement status
WT07996X12
33
Floor Layout
HWHP operation status
AHC status
Chiller unit status
MEHT-CH&HP unit status
WT07996X12
34
For building managers Chapter 2
2-1-2. Group icons
Each group icon indicates the operation condition of the group. Click the icon, and then click [Advanced] to bring up the operation settings screen.
[1] Air conditioning unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Filter sign ON *1 *15
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON *2
Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF *3
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
Energy-saving ON
*4 *10
Setback ON *8
Unit unknown *9
Occupied/Vacant
*5 *6 *15
Bright/Dark
*7 *8 *15
Room temperature display *11 *15 *17
Set temperature display *11 *15
Room humidity display *12 *13 *15
(blue)
(gray)
Hold ON *14
(yellow)
(gray)
(red)
Operation suspended
*16
AI-Smart Start ON*18
(blue)
*1 Whether or not to display the filter sign ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*2 If the LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of Mr. Slim units, "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON" icon will appear, even when the LOSSNAY unit is operated individually. (Applicable M-NET adapter model: PAC-SF48/50/60/70/80/81MA-E)
*3 If a LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in multiple groups, the LOSSNAY unit may be in operation, even when the "Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF" icon is displayed.
*4 The "Energy-saving ON" icon will appear while the energy-save control is performed on the LOSSNAY unit group, group of LOSSNAY with heater/humidifier, or the outdoor unit that is connected to these groups.
*5 The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon will appear only when the remote controller in the group has an occupancy sensor. (ME remote
controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA)) The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon will appear only when [ ] (blue),
[ ] (gray), or [
] (blue/gray) is selected in the initial settings.
*6 The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon takes priority over the "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON" and "Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF" icons.
*7 The Brightness/Darkness status icon will not appear only when the remote controller in the group has a brightness sensor. (ME remote
controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA)) The Brightness/Darkness status icon will appear only when [ ]
(yellow), [ ] (gray), or [
] (yellow/gray) is selected in the initial settings.
*8 The "Setback ON" icon takes priority over the Brightness/Darkness status icon.
*9 The "Unit unknown" icon will stay when the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 cannot be recognized after startup. Check for proper connection of the air conditioning units and proper group settings.
*10 The "Energy-saving ON" icon takes priority over the "Room temperature display" and "Room humidity display" icons.
*11 Display option of the temperature can be selected from [Room temp. (Always)], [Room temp. (During operation)], [Set temp.], [Room temp. (Always)/Set temp.], [Room temp.(During op.)/Set temp.], or [Hide] in the initial settings. When [Set temp.], [Room temp.(Always)/Set temp.], or [Room temp.(During op.)/Set temp.] is selected, the setting is effective only on the floor layout.
*12 The "Room humidity display" icon will appear only when the remote controller in the group has a humidity sensor. (ME remote controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA))
*13 Whether or not to display the humidity ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*14 The "Hold ON" icon is displayed for the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not for the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
*15 Initial settings can be configured in the basic settings screen on the LCD or the Web browser for initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details. For how the icon and value are displayed according to the settings, refer to [2] "Floor Layout display" in 2-1-3 "Monitoring the operation status".
*16 The "Operation suspended" icon appears when an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function).
*17 The outlet air temperature is displayed for the outlet air temperature control units.
*18 The "AI-Smart Start ON" icon will appear 90 minutes before the scheduled start time and stays on the screen until the scheduled start time. If the room temperature has not reached the set temperature at the scheduled start time, the icon will remain on the screen after the scheduled start time. The icon will disappear when the set temperature has been reached.
WT07996X12
35
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
ON
OFF
Error
Filter sign ON *1 *6
Schedule set *3
Schedule disabled *3 Energy-saving ON *2 Night Purge ON *3
Hold ON *7
Operation suspended
*8
(blue)
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group and HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
Energy-saving ON *2
Water temperature display *4
(red)
[4] Chiller unit group
ON
OFF
Hold ON *7*10
Operation suspended
*8*9
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
[5] MEHT-CH&HP unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
[6] Other equipment group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set *5 *6
Schedule disabled
Hold ON *7
*1 Whether or not to display the filter sign ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*2 The "Energy-saving ON" icon will appear while the energy-save control is performed on the LOSSNAY unit group, group of LOSSNAY with heater/humidifier, or the outdoor unit that is connected to these groups. This icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*3 If Schedule is set during Night Purge operation, then the order of priority for display will be "Night Purge ON" "Schedule set". Even if Schedule is disabled, the order of priority for display will be "Night Purge ON" "Schedule disabled".
*4 The "Water temperature display" icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*5 If any schedule setting is applied to a DIDO controller whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen in the initial settings), the "Schedule set" icon will appear, but the scheduled operations will not be performed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods
*6 Initial settings can be configured in the basic settings screen on the Initial Setting Tool, LCD, or the Web browser for initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
*7 The "Hold ON" icon is displayed for the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not for the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
*8 The "Operation suspended" icon appears when an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function).
*9 The "Operation suspended" icon will appear only for the Air To Water (PWFY) unit groups.
*10 The "Hold ON" icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV) unit groups.
Note: Icons can be changed in the group settings screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
36
For building managers Chapter 2
2-1-3. Monitoring the operation status
This section explains how to monitor the operation status of units.
[1] Home screen The Home screen displays the operation status, electric energy consumption, and current error status of the units on each floor. Placing the mouse cursor over the "Floor display area" displays a preview of the floor layout so that you can check the unit operation status. Clicking "Displayed floor switching area" switches the floors displayed in "Floor display area" in units of 10 floors.
Displayed floor switching area Switches the floors displayed in the floor
display area.
Floor display area Displays the operation
status of the air conditioning units for 10
floors.
Number of units currently in error
Electric energy consumption Displays the electric energy consumption and outdoor temperature for the entire system. Clicking this displays the Energy Management screen.
Notice Displays the errors that are occurring. Clicking this displays the Notice screen.
Error notification Appears when an error occurs. Place the mouse cursor on the floor display area.
Preview display area Displays a preview of the floor layout and the operation status of air conditioning units.
Undefined floor Click to display the unit
groups that are not assigned to a floor.
Item
Displayed floor switching area
Floor display area
Entire building Click to operate all unit groups at once.
Description
Switches the floors displayed in the floor display area in units of 10 floors. It simply displays the status of the air conditioning units registered to the floors.
(Green): One or more units on the floor are in operation. (Gray): All units on the floor are stopped. (Red): One or more units on the floor are in error.
Note: The number of buttons for switching displayed floors that are shown differs depending on the settings configured in "Floor settings" of Initial Setting Tool.
Displays the operation status of the air conditioning units for 10 floors. It simply displays the status of the air conditioning units registered to the floors.
Green Gray Red
: One or more units on the floor are in operation. : All units on the floor are stopped. : One or more units on the floor are in error.
WT07996X12
37
Item Electric energy consumption Notice
Error notification
Preview display area
Description
Displays the electric energy consumption of the entire air conditioning system. "Yearly," "Monthly," and "Daily" can be set for the display.
Displays the units with errors occurring in the entire air conditioning system.
The error notification appears when an error occurs and it can be notified with a buzzer sound. Clicking "Check" changes the screen to "Error list" of the "Notice" menu.
Note: To enable this function, click [Screen display settings] under [Settings], and set the Error warning setting to [ON].
Placing the mouse cursor over the floor display area displays a preview of the floor layout display.
[2] Floor Layout display Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Floor Layout] or "Floor display area" to display the operation status of unit groups on the floor layout. The floor layout to be displayed can be changed by clicking "Floor display area" and "Displayed floor switching area" while the floor layout is displayed.
Floor name
Number of units currently in error
Click to move to the upper floor.
Display style Switches the display style.
Unit type Switches the unit type to be displayed.
Close Click to return to the Home screen.
Select all Click to select all unit groups that are displayed.
Displayed floor switching area Switches the floors displayed in the floor
display area.
Floor display area Switches the floor to
display.
Click to move to the lower floor.
Zoom bar Click to zoom in/out the floor layout.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Group icon
Group name
Room temperature/ set temperature/humidity
Note: The room temperature, set temperature, or humidity can be displayed next to the group icon. The temperature display setting can be changed in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for how to make the temperature display setting.
Humidity display
Room temp.
Set temp.
Room temp./Set temp.
OFF *1
ON
*1 Even if the humidity display setting is ON, the set temperature takes precedence when "Room temp./Set temp."is set.
Note: If you click "Floor display area" in the Home screen, the menu changes to [Monitor/Operation] and the floor layout of the clicked floor is displayed.
Note: If a floor layout is not registered, a floor layout will not be displayed and all unit groups will be displayed in "Undefined floor."
Note: The group name can be displayed using up to 10 double-byte, or 10 to 18 single-byte characters. The number of characters that can be displayed differs depending on character type. Name setting is carried out through initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
38
For building managers Chapter 2
[3] Group list Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Show groups] to display the operation status of unit groups.
Controller Click to narrow down the groups
to display.
Number of units currently in error
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Group icon
Room temperature
Room humidity
Set temperature
Operation mode
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode". · Air conditioning unit group
Cool
Dry
Fan
Heat
Auto
Auto (Cool)
Auto (Heat)
Setback
· LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Bypass
Heat Recovery
Auto
· Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
Cooling
Note: In [Controller], it is possible to narrow down the unit groups for group display into "Centralized controller units," "Block units," and "Energy management block units."
Note: For how to configure centralized controller name setting, block and energy management block settings, and name settings, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings).
Note: The group name can be displayed using up to 10 double-byte, or 10 to 18 single-byte characters. The number of characters that can be displayed differs depending on character type. Name setting is carried out through initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
39
Centralized controller selection
Block selection
Energy management block selection
Centralized controller name
Block name
* Example of narrowing down the range in [Controller]
Energy management block name
1st floor Centralized controller (Centralized controller units)
Company A (Energy mgmt block units)
Administration Dept. (Block units)
Accounting Dept. (Block units)
2nd floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
Sales Dept. (Block units)
Company A Facility (Energy mgmt block units)
3rd floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
No-name block 4 (Energy mgmt block units)
4th floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
WT07996X12
40
For building managers Chapter 2
[4] HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [HWHP] to display the operation status of HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
Note: [HWHP] will not appear if no HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) units have been registered to any group.
Note: Fan mode will appear only for CAHV and QAHV units. Brine temperature will appear only for CRHV units.
Note: When CAHV, CRHV, and QAHV units exist all together, QAHV units are displayed at top.
Controller Click to narrow down the
HWHP unit groups to display.
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Group name
Group icons
QAHV units
CAHV/CRHV units
(1) QAHV unit
Operation mode
Set water temperature
Control water temperature
Hot water storage temperature
Inlet water temperature
Fan mode
Outdoor temperature
Outlet water temperature
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Touching the control water temperature button will display the value of the water temperature sensor installed in the HWHP unit group. Refer to the outdoor unit manual for details about the location of the sensor.
WT07996X12
Six-sensor
Three-sensor 41
(2) CAHV/CRHV unit
Operation mode
Representative water temperature
Brine temperature Inlet water temperature Fan mode
Set water temperature
Outdoor temperature
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
Outlet water temperature
[5] Chiller unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Chiller] to display the operation status of chiller unit groups.
Note: [Chiller] will not appear if no chiller units have been registered to any group. Note: AE-200, AE-50, and EW-50 cannot be connected to AIR COOLED CHILLING UNIT EACV-P900YA(-N)(-BS).
[EACV/EAHV series P900 (30HP)] The operation status of EACV/EAHV series P900 (30HP) is shown as follows.
Controller Click to narrow down the chiller unit groups to display.
Group name Group icons Operation mode Set temperature
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once. Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Fan mode
Temperatures Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
WT07996X12
42
For building managers Chapter 2
[EACV/EAHV series P1500 (50HP)/P1800 (60HP)] The operation status of EACV/EAHV series P1500 (50HP)/P1800 (60HP) is shown as follows. Only the system leader group icon is available for selecting the group. Touching the system leader group icon also selects the icons for the simultaneous operation group in the same system.
Simultaneous operation group name
Select all System
Simultaneous operation group icon
Operation status
System leader group (Simultaneous operation group)
Simultaneous operation group
Simultaneous operation group
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Cooling
Heating
Heating ECO Anti-freeze
WT07996X12
43
[6] MEHT-CH&HP unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [MEHT-CH&HP] to display the operation status of MEHTCH&HP unit groups.
Note: [MEHT-CH&HP] will not appear if no MEHT-CH&HP units have been registered to any group.
Controller Click to narrow down the MEHT-CH&HP unit groups
to display.
Group name Group icons Operation mode
Set temperature
Temperatures (Manager3000) Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed. (Temperatures are detected by the representative unit.)
Temperatures (W3000) Outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Cooling
Heating
WT07996X12
44
For building managers Chapter 2
[7] Measurement Status This section explains how to check the measurement data of the temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and metering devices. Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Measurement Status] to display the Measurement Status screen.
Note: An AI controller (PAC-YG63MCA), a commercially available temperature sensor, and a humidity sensor are required to measure the temperature and humidity.
Note: A PI controller (PAC-YG60MCA) and a commercially available pulse-output metering device is required to measure the electric, water, heat, and gas consumptions.
Note: A PI controller (PAC-YG60MCA) is not required when the built-in Pulse Input (PI) is used on the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
Measurement device icon
Controller Click to narrow down the measurement device to display.
Measurement device name
Measurement value
Item Controller
Measurement value
Description
Narrows down the measurement devices to display on a centralized controller basis.
The current measurement values will appear. Note: The following icons are used to indicate the measuring devices. Icons will appear in orange when the measurement value reaches the upper or lower alarm threshold value that has been set in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for the settings methods.
Normal
Upper/lower alarm threshold value is reached. (Orange)
Communication error/sensor error
(Orange)
Temperature sensor
*1
Humidity sensor
*1
Metering device
*2
*1 When there is a communication error, the measurement value of the temperature or humidity sensor will be "--."
*2 When there is a communication error, the measurement value of the metering device will be the measured value immediately before the error detection.
WT07996X12
45
[8] AHC Status On the AHC Status screen, the status of input and output ports of each Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER (AHC) can be monitored. Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [AHC Status] to display the AHC Status screen.
Controller
AHC icon AHC address
Output status
Status of related equipment
Input status
Item Controller
AHC icon
AHC address Input status
Output status
Description Narrows down the measurement devices to display on a centralized controller basis. The following icons indicate the AHC status.
: Normal
: A communication error is occurring or an error signal has been input to the AHC.
The address of the connected AHC will appear. [Input port code * + Input port name + Input status] will appear. * DI1DI15 (Digital input), EI1EI4 (Extended digital input), AI1AI8 (Analog input)
Note: The status of the unused ports will not appear. Note: If a communication error occurs with AHC, no port information will appear. [Output port code * + Output port name + Output status] will appear. * DO1DO9 (Digital output), EO1EO4 (Extended digital output), AO1AO2 (Analog output) Note: The status of the unused ports will not appear. Note: If a communication error occurs with AHC, no port information will appear. Click to display the status of the equipment that are used to control the equipments that are connected to the AHC.
Status of related equipment
*1 The item will not appear if the number of units is "0."
WT07996X12
46
For building managers Chapter 2
2-1-4. Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated
In the screens under the [Monitor/Operation] menu, select the icon(s) of the group(s) to be operated as explained below.
[1] Selecting group icons
(1) Selecting unit group(s)
(1) In the Floor Layout screen or group list, click the icon(s) of the group(s) you want to operate. The selected group icon(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Floor Layout
Group selection
Group list
Group selection
Deselect all
Deselect all
Close
Close
(2) Selecting all unit groups on the selected floor
(1) Select the floor for which you wish to perform operation by making a selection in "Displayed floor switching area" and then "Floor display area" on the Home (Preview) screen, and then click [Select all] on the [Floor Layout] screen. All icon(s) on the selected floor will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Home (Preview)
Floor Layout
Select all
Displayed floor switching area
Select the unit of floors that includes the floor for which you wish to perform
operation.
Floor display area Select the floor for which
you wish to perform
operation.
Close
Deselect all
WT07996X12
47
(3) Selecting all groups
(1) In the group list, click [Select all]. The all icon(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Select all Deselect all
Close
(4) Selecting all groups of a given centralized controller
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the controller selection screen, select a centralized controller. The unit groups that are under the control of the selected centralized controller will appear. In the group list (centralized controller units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Controller
Group list
Controller selection Groups of the selected controller Select all
Deselect all
Close
(5) Selecting all groups in a given block
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the block selection screen, select a block. The unit groups that belong to the selected block will appear. In the group list (block units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Block selection
Groups of the selected block
Select all
Controller
Deselect all
Close
WT07996X12
48
For building managers Chapter 2
(6) Selecting all groups in a given energy management block
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the block selection screen, select an energy management block. The unit groups that belong to the selected energy management block will appear. In the group list (energy management block units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Block selection
Groups of the selected energy management block
Select all
Controller
Deselect all
Close
(7) Selecting all groups in the entire building (1) In the Home screen, click [Entire building]. To cancel all group selections, click [Close] in the taskbar.
Entire building
Close
Note: HWHP units, chiller units, and MEHT-CH&HP units cannot be selected with the [Entire building] button.
WT07996X12
49
[2] Selecting equipment type (1) When the equipment types of all selected groups are the same
Selecting the group icons to operate and clicking [Advanced] in the taskbar will bring up the operation settings screen for the selected groups. Refer to section 2-1-5 "Advanced settings" for details about the advanced settings.
Selecting groups of the same equipment
type
Taskbar
Advanced settings
Note: [ON] and [OFF] operations can be performed on the taskbar for the selected unit groups.
(2) When the equipment types of the selected groups are different
Selecting the group icons to operate will bring up the equipment type selection options in the taskbar. Select an equipment type, and click [Operations] to display the operation settings screen. Refer to section 2-1-5 "Advanced settings" for details about the advanced settings.
Taskbar
Operations Click to operate all groups of the selected equipment type at once.
Note: When two or more equipment types are selected, only the [ON/OFF] and [Schedule] settings can be configured. Note: [Other equipment] in the taskbar indicates general equipment.
WT07996X12
50
[3] Selecting HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV), chiller unit, and MEHT-CH&HP unit groups (1) Selecting HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups
(1) In the HWHP screen, click the group you want to operate. The selected HWHP unit group will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect.
Note: Clicking [Select all] will select CAHV and CRHV units only. Note: Multiple unit groups can be selected only for CAHV and CRHV units.
Deselect all
Select all
For building managers Chapter 2
Close
(2) Selecting chiller unit groups (1) In the Chiller screen, click the group(s) you want to operate. The selected chiller unit group(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Deselect all Select all
Close
WT07996X12
51
(3) Selecting MEHT-CH&HP unit group (1) In the MEHT-CH&HP screen, click the group you want to operate. The selected MEHT-CH&HP unit group will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel the selection, click [Close] in the taskbar.
Close
WT07996X12
52
For building managers Chapter 2
2-1-5. Advanced settings
In the screens under [Monitor/Operation] menu, selecting the group icon(s) and clicking [Advanced] in the taskbar will bring up the operation settings screen for the selected group(s). The current operation status will appear. Change necessary operation settings, and then click [Send] to reflect the changes. Click [Close] to return to the previous screen without making any changes.
Note: When the setting is changed from other controllers, the operation status shown on the screen will not be updated while the screen is open.
[1] Air conditioning unit group
Set temperature Group name
ON/OFF
Operation mode
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Air Direction Hold
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Fan Speed
Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Filter Sign Reset Click to reset the filter sign.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Air Direction Fan Speed
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Click the desired operation mode. [Cool], [Dry], [Fan], [Heat], [Auto], [Setback]
Select an operation mode.
Note: When the operation mode signals from the cooling/heating switchover model of units are mixed (Cool and Heat), the operation mode will not change and the selected operation mode will blink.
Note: The Setback mode can be selected on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Depending on settings values resulting from restrictions by device functions and set temperature range restriction functions, temperature settings ranges may be restricted.
Note: For the same indoor unit, when changing operation mode and set temperature from multiple operation devices (system controllers, remote controllers), display of outside the allowable settings range may occur.
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
Note: Depending on the unit model, setting in 0.5°C units and 1°C units is possible.
Note: If the indoor unit supports the dual-set-point function in the Auto mode and when the operation mode above is set to Auto or Setback, two set temperatures for Cool mode and Heat mode can be set.
Note: When the indoor units that support the dual-set-point function and the indoor units that do not support the dual-set-point function exist in the same group, only one set temperature can be set in the Auto mode.
Note: Set the outlet air temperature for the outlet air temperature control units.
Note: The set temperature is not displayed when the operation group contains both free-plan units and outlet air temperature control units.
Adjust the air direction with the
Auto
Swing
buttons.
Adjust the fan speed
Auto
with the
buttons.
WT07996X12
53
Item Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY
Schedule
Hold
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Select [High] or [Low].
Switches the fan speed of the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set. Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will not be disabled.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Filter Sign Reset
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the filter maintenance icon [ ] and the cumulative operation time that is used to determine the display timing of the icon. When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter.
Note: After the filter sign is reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on the local remote controllers.
Note: Refer to 2-1-6 "Resetting the cumulative filter usage time" for how to reset the cumulative filter usage time.
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Send Close
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, Set temperature, Filter Sign Reset, Air Direction, Fan Speed, and Timer.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Note: If "Timer" operation is prohibited, scheduled operations set on the local remote controller will be disabled.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
* After [Send] is clicked, it takes a while for the status of the LOSSNAY unit group icons to be updated. * If a LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in multiple groups, the LOSSNAY unit may be in operation, even when
the LOSSNAY unit is displayed as "stopped".
WT07996X12
54
For building managers Chapter 2
Note: When the indoor units support a dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set for the Auto mode. When this function is used, indoor units automatically switch over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures. The graph below shows an example of operation patterns of units operated in the dual-set-point mode.
Set temp. (Cool)
Operation patterns in the dual-set-point mode
Room temperature fluctuates in response to changes in outdoor temperature.
Set temp. (Heat)
Heat
Cool
Heat
Automatically switches over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures.
Room temp.
Cool
If the indoor units of the selected unit group support the dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set.
(1) Temperature setting for a group in which all indoor units support dual-set-point mode
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
(2) Temperature setting for when the groups that support the dual-set-point mode and the groups that do not are selected together
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
Set temperature (singleset-point) for groups that do not support the dualset-point mode
WT07996X12
55
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Group name ON/OFF
Fan Speed Hold
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Ventilation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Humidify
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Filter Sign Reset Click to reset the filter sign.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Ventilation mode
Fan Speed
Humidify Schedule
Hold
Filter Sign Reset
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Turns on or off the units.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: If the units are turned off during the Night Purge operation, the Night Purge
operation will not be performed until the next day.
Select a ventilation mode.
Click the desired ventilation mode. [Bypass], [Heat Recovery], [Auto]
Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Auto
Adjust the fan speed with the
buttons.
Note: During the Night Purge operation, the fan speed can be adjusted but
will
not be displayed.
Select [ON], [OFF], or [Auto].
Switches the operation status of the humidification function. Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the filter maintenance icon [ ] and the cumulative operation time that is used to determine the display timing of the icon. When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter.
Note: After the filter sign is reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on the local remote controllers.
Note: Refer to 2-1-6 "Resetting the cumulative filter usage time" for how to reset the cumulative filter usage time.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF and Filter Sign Reset.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
56
For building managers Chapter 2
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Group name
ON/OFF
Operation mode
Set temperature Hold
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode Set temperature
Schedule
Hold
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Heating], [Heating ECO], [Hot Water], [Anti-freeze], [Cooling]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, and Set temperature.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
57
[4] HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit group
(1) QAHV unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Mode settings Operation ON sensor, Operation OFF sensor, Operation ON differential
Set temperature
Operation mode
Schedule
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Error Reset
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Send Click to reflect the changes made. Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Mode settings
Set temperature
Fan Mode
Schedule
Error Reset
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Mode 1]
Displays the selected mode setting (Operation ON sensor, Operation OFF sensor,
Operation ON differential).
Note:The setting can be made for each operation mode on the AE-200 LCD.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Select [Reset] and click [Send]. Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit". Click [Send]. Click [Close].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note:When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Resets the error. When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers: ON/OFF
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
58
For building managers Chapter 2
(2) CAHV/CRHV unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Operation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Set temperature Hold
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Error Reset
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode Set temperature
Schedule
Hold
Error Reset
Fan Mode
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Heating], [Heating ECO], [Hot Water], [Anti-freeze]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note:When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the error. When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Note: The fan mode for CRHV units cannot be operated.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, and Set temperature.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
59
[5] Chiller unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Operation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Set temperature
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Fan Mode
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Cooling], [Heating], [Heating ECO], [Anti-freeze]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note:When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, and Set temperature.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
60
For building managers Chapter 2
[6] MEHT-CH&HP unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Operation mode
Set temperature
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Schedule
Send Click to reflect the changes made. Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Schedule
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Cooling], [Heating]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
61
[7] Other equipment group
Group name ON/OFF
Hold
Schedule
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Schedule
Hold
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
Note: General equipment whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen
in the initial settings) cannot be operated and an operation prohibition mark is displayed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
62
For building managers Chapter 2
2-1-6. Resetting the cumulative filter usage time
The filter usage time can be reset after cleaning filters on the air conditioning units.
Note: This function is available only when logged in with building manager privileges. Note: The filter usage time can also be reset for the air conditioning unit group whose filter sign is not turned on. Note: Cumulative filter usage time can also be reset by displaying a list of air conditioning unit groups on which the filter sign is
displayed. To display the list, click [Filter sign] under the [Notice] menu. Refer to 2-4-4 "Filter sign".
[1] Selecting unit group(s)
In the Floor Layout screen or group list, select the icons corresponding to the group or groups whose filter usage time is to be reset.
Note: When filter cleaning was performed on some or all groups on a given floor, click [Select all] on the Floor Layout screen to select all groups on the floor, and then reset the filter usage time.
Floor Layout
Group list
Advanced settings
[2] Resetting the cumulative filter usage time Click [Advanced] to open the operation settings window for the selected group. Click Filter Sign Reset to display the check mark, and click [Send].
Advanced settings
Filter Sign Reset
Advanced settings
Send
Note: The filter signs in each group will be reset if they are displayed. Note: The cumulative filter usage time in each unit will be reset if no filter signs are displayed. Note: If there are groups with filter signs and no filter signs, a dialog will appear asking to choose between resetting the
cumulative filter usage time for the unit group whose filter sign is turned on or resetting the cumulative filter usage time for all selected unit groups.
WT07996X12
63
2-1-7. Operation suspension function
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function), the operation control status will be indicated with an icon and a message. While this indicator is displayed, the status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON].
Note: Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for receiving an emergency stop signal through an external contact. Note: Refer to Instruction Book (BACnet® function) for receiving an emergency stop signal from BACnet®. Note: Refer to Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for information about the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function). Note: Equipment connected to a DIDO controller (PAC-YG66DCA) are excluded from the operation suspension function.
[1] Floor Layout screen or group list
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear and all the units in the group will stop or remain stopped.
Floor Layout
Group list
[2] Quick access on the task bar
When a group is selected whose operation is under suspension, its operation status will appear as [OFF], and this status cannot be changed from the task bar.
WT07996X12
64
For building managers Chapter 2
[3] Advanced settings screen
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear next to the [ON/OFF] button and next to the [ON/OFF] button under "Prohibit Remote Controller Operation." While this icon is displayed, the operation status cannot be changed. The type of operation suspension function will appear in the top center of the window.
ON/OFF OFF will be highlighted while the group is under operation suspension.
"Operation suspended" icon
"Operation suspended" icon
Type of operation suspension function (Emergency stop or Energy-save)
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation The ON/OFF button will be grayed out and not available for selection.
Item ON/OFF
"Operation suspended" icon
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Description
The operation status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON] while the group is under operation suspension.
The icon [ ] appears while the group is under operation suspension.
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building
management system (BACnet®), [
] will appear.
While the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function,
[
] will appear.
When the group is under operation suspension, the ON/OFF button under "Prohibit Remote Controller Operation" will be grayed out and not available for selection.
WT07996X12
65
2-2. Energy management
The energy-control-related status, such as electric energy consumption, operation time, and outdoor temperature, can be displayed in a graph. Also, preset target value of the electric energy consumption can be checked.
Note: Energy use status data and ranking data can be output in a CSV format. Note: Output to CSV is only possible on a PC. Output from tablet (Android, iOS tablet) is not possible and the [Download] button is
not displayed. Note: File names, as well as date formats, delimiter characters, and temperature units (°C, °F) within the files output as CSV will
use formats set as initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods. Note: For the file name and AE No. within the files output as CSV, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. Note: Energy management function cannot be used on HWHP, chiller units, and MEHT-CH&HP units.
Important Energy management settings and measurement settings are required beforehand to display a graph. Refer to the Instruction
Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
2-2-1. Energy Use Status
On the Energy Use Status screen, the energy-control-related status, such as electric energy consumption, operation time, and outdoor temperature, can be displayed in a graph. Operators can check the detailed status of given indoor units by specifying the date to display the data per unit address, group, block, or energy management block. Also, the status of other indoor units can be displayed at the same time for comparison. Displaying energy-control-related status of each hour, day, and month in a graph visualizes the energy-saving status. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Energy Use Status] to access the Energy Use Status screen.
(1) Click [Edit] to set the display items.
Display target Comparison target
Graph region
Edit Click to change the display target and comparison target.
Display items for line graph
Detailed information Mousing over the graph area will display the values on the bar and line graphs.
Display items for bar graph
Download Click to output the data in a CSV format. (This button is not displayed on a tablet.)
Display target
Display range
Date to display the data
Display items for line graph
Display items for bar graph
Display range
Display items for line graph
Cancel Click to return to the graph screen without making any
changes.
Comparison target
Same as display target Check the checkbox to set the same date as the date selected in "Date to display the data".
Comparison date
Display items for bar graph
OK Click to confirm the changes and return to the graph screen.
WT07996X12
66
For building managers Chapter 2
Item Display range
Description
Select [Block], [Group], [Address], or [Energy mgmt block] to display its data. Select a centralized controller, and then select a block, group, address, or energy management block to display its data.
Out of the units that are under the control of the centralized controller selected in [Centralized controller selection], only the blocks and energy management blocks to which the unit groups managed by tenant managers belong are displayed.
Target block selection
Centralized controller selection
Display target selection
Display target
Target group selection
Target address selection
Target energy management block selection
Note: When the name has not been registered, the display varies with the display range setting as follows.
Display range Block Group
Address *2
Energy management block
Name display "Block" + AE No. *1 + Block number "Group" + AE No. *1 + Group number <Built-in Pulse Input (PI)>
"Metering device" + AE No. *1
<Other than built-in Pulse Input (PI)> "Address" + AE No. *1 + Address number
"Energy mgmt block" + AE No. *1 + Energy management block number
*1 For AE No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. *2 There is no function to register a name per address.
Note: DIDO controllers (PAC-YG66DCA) are not displayed.
WT07996X12
67
Item
Description Click [Date] to specify a date to display the data. The date can be specified as daily, monthly, or yearly.
Year selection
Month selection
Date selection
Date to display the data
Note: The storage period of the energy use status data is as follows.
Date selection Year Month Date
Data storage period The last 3 years including the current year The last 25 months including the current month The last 25 months including the current month
Comparison target
Comparison date
Select a block name, group name, address number, or energy management block name to display the comparison data. (The comparison target selection screen is the same as the display target selection screen.)
Specify a date to display the comparison data. (The comparison date selection screen is the same as the display target date selection screen.)
WT07996X12
68
For building managers Chapter 2
Item
Description
Select an item to display its data in the bar graph. Select a display range from [Block], [Group], [Address], or [Energy mgmt block] to display its data. The selectable items vary, depending on the display range. Only the items that can be displayed in the graph appear. Refer to the table below for details.
Indoor unit Display range
Address*7
Display items for bar graph
Display item
*3 *4
*3
*3
*3
Group*7
*1 *2
Block*7
Energy management block*7
PI controller*5 *8/Built-in Pulse Input (PI)*6 *8
Display range
Display item
Display items for bar graph Address
*1 The electric energy (kWh) consumed by indoor units will appear in the graph. The values are apportioned based on the setting for "Indoor unit operation apportioning mode". Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for the "Indoor unit operation apportioning mode" setting.
*2 A small amount of electric energy consumption (kWh) may appear in the graph even when no indoor units have been operated. This is because the standby electric energy is apportioned, which is normal.
*3 The indoor unit's cumulative operation time (minute) for the selected item will appear in the graph. · "FAN operation time" is the cumulative duration of time in which the indoor unit is ON. · "Thermo-ON time (Total/Cool/Heat)" is the cumulative duration of time in which the refrigerant is flowing into the indoor unit. (Cool: when the Cool mode is selected; Heat: when the Heat mode is selected; Total: when either mode is selected)
*4 Only "FAN operation time" is displayed for LOSSNAY units.
*5 Displays display item buttons for the name of the metering device connected to the PI controller. Names are those as set on the Measurement screen. If the name is not registered, then if the metering device units are kWh, this will display "Electric energy 1""Electric energy 4", if the units are m3 "Water quantity 1""Water quantity 4", and if the units are MJ "Heat quantity 1""Heat quantity 4". If there are no metering device units "-", then this will not be displayed. For how to register the names, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings).
*6 If using a Pulse Input (PI), the display item buttons for the name of the metering device connected to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 CN7 will be displayed.
*7 "Energy Management License Pack" is required. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only)
*8 If "Energy Management License Pack" has not been registered, only [Day] is available for selection as a Date range. To select [Month] or [Year], "Energy Management License Pack" is required.
WT07996X12
69
Item
Description
Select an item to display its data in the line graph. Note: When the display range is [Block] or [Energy mgmt block], display items for line graph are not displayed.
Display items for line graph
Indoor unit Display range
Address
Display item
*1 *5
*1 *5
*1 *5
Group
*1 *2 *3 *6
Block
Energy management block
AI controller *3 Display range
Address *5
*1 *2 *3 *6
Display item
AHC Display range
Display item
Display items for line graph
Address *4
*1 *2 *3 *6
*1 When [Day] is selected as a date, the temperature values obtained every hour and half hour will appear. When [Month] is selected, the average daily temperature values will appear. When [Year] is selected, the average monthly temperature values will appear.
*2 [Outdoor Temp.] will appear only when the temperature sensor to measure the outdoor temperature is set in the Energy Management settings for the login destination centralized controller. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
*3 Displays display item buttons for the name of the sensor connected to the AI controller (PAC-YG63MCA). Names can be registered in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for how to register sensor names.
*4 "Energy Management License Pack" is required. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only) *5 If "Energy Management License Pack" has not been registered, only [Day] is available for selection as a Date
range. To select [Month] or [Year], "Energy Management License Pack" is required. *6 [Outdoor Temp.] is a value measured by the device set as an outdoor temperature sensor.
Note: The background of the graph will appear in red when the temperature and humidity data of the AI controller (PAC-YG63MCA) are displayed and when the measurement value reaches the upper or lower alarm threshold value that has been set in the initial settings. The background will stay in red even when the measurement value becomes between the upper and lower threshold values. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for how to configure upper and lower alarm threshold values.
When the value reaches the upper alarm threshold value (in red)
When the value reaches the lower alarm
threshold value (in red)
WT07996X12
70
For building managers Chapter 2
Note: By quickly switching to items displayed on a graph and dates, it is possible to confirm the energy usage status.
Display target
Date to display the data
Comparison target
Comparison date
(1) To switch the display target Click [Display target] or [Comparison target] to display the target selection screen, and switch to the items to display on a graph. It is not possible to switch to [Display target] and [Comparison target] that have a display range different from before switching.
(2) To switch the date Click [Date to display the data] or [Comparison date] to display the date selection screen, and switch to the dates to display on a graph. Ensure that the [Date to display the data] and the [Comparison date] units are the same.
WT07996X12
71
(2) Click [OK] to return to the previous screen. The display target data and the comparison target data will appear in a bar graph and a line graph.
Item
Bar graph/line graph Display target
Bar graph
(Blue)
Description
Comparison target
(Light blue)
Target value *1
Graph region
Line graph
(Orange)
(Blue)
*1 The target values will appear in the graph when "Block" or "Energy management block" is selected as a display range and when [Electric Energy] is selected as a display item for bar graph.
Note: The data for a certain period of time may not appear if it does not exist due to the changes of the daylight saving time setting or current time setting. If the data overlap for a certain period of time due to the time overlap that was occurred when daylight saving ended or the current time setting was changed, the newer data will appear in the graph.
Note: When the date is specified as daily, the graph is shown in 30-minute increments.
Note: When the target value is set, areas exceeding the target value will be displayed in pink.
When exceeding target value
Remaining to target value
Portion exceeding target value Consumed amount
Portion remaining to target value
Target value
Consumed amount
Target value
Detailed information
Mouse over the graph area to display the values on the bar graph and line graph for the dates moused over on the graph area.
Line graph value (display target, orange)
Bar graph value (display target, blue)
Target value
Line graph value (comparison target, blue)
Bar graph value (comparison target, light blue)
WT07996X12
72
For building managers Chapter 2
(3) To output the displayed measurement data in a CSV format, click [Download]. The file name and file format will vary as shown below, depending on the selected date range.
Note: This function cannot be used on a tablet.
Item File name
Description
<When any item in the "Comparison target" field is selected> Date range: Year EM_AnnualTrend_[yyyy]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type]_[YYYY]_[Comparison target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Month EM_MonthlyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type]_[YYYY]-[MM]_ [Comparison target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Day EM_DailyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type]_[YYYY]-[MM][DD]_[Comparison target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
<When no item in the "Comparison target" field is selected> Date range: Year EM_AnnualTrend_[yyyy]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Month EM_MonthlyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Day EM_DailyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
WT07996X12
73
Item File name
Description
File-name contents
Format
[yyyy] [mm] [dd]
[Display target] *1
[Bar graph type]
[Line graph type]
[YYYY] [MM] [DD] [Comparison target] [Bar graph type] [Line graph type]
The year specified in the "Date to display the data" field
The month specified in the "Date to display the data" field
The date specified in the "Date to display the data" field
Address
<Indoor unit> AE No. + "_" + "A" + M-NET address (001050) + "_" + "00"
<PI controller> AE No. + "_" + "A" + M-NET address (001050) + "_" + Metering device No. (0104)
<Built-in Pulse Input (PI)> AE No. + "_" + "A" + "_" + Channel No. (0104)
<AI controller or AHC> AE No. + "_" + "A" + M-NET address (001050, 201250) + "_" + Sensor No. (0102)
Group
AE No. + "_" + "G" + Group No. (001050) + "_" + "00"
Block
AE No. + "_" + "B" + Block No. (001050, 999 *2) + "_" + "00"
Energy
AE No. + "_" + "E" + Energy management block No. (001200) + "_" +
management block "00"
B01: Indoor unit electric energy
B02: Fan operation time
B03: Thermo-ON time (Total)
B04: Thermo-ON time (Cool)
B05: Thermo-ON time (Heat)
B06: PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI) electric energy
B08: PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI) water quantity
B09: PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI) heat quantity
B00: No selection
B000: Unregistered blocks
L01: Set temperature (Cool)
L02: Set temperature (Heat)
L03: Room temperature
L04: AI controller temperature
L05: AHC temperature
L06: Outdoor temperature
L08: AI controller humidity
L00: No selection
The year specified in the "Comparison date" field
The month specified in the "Comparison date" field
The date specified in the "Comparison date" field
Address
Group Block
The same output format as for display target
Energy management block
The type of the item selected for the bar graph display item for comparison target
The type of the item selected for the line graph display item for comparison target
*1 For AE No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. *2 "B999" = Total of all blocks
WT07996X12
74
For building managers Chapter 2
Item File format
Description
Row
Item
1st File Type
2nd Date
Date range Year Month Day Year Month Day
3rd
Display target/ Comparison target *5
Format
413
412
411
yyyy:YYYY
yyyy/mm:YYYY/MM
yyyy/mm/dd:YYYY/MM/DD
Address
<Indoor unit> "Address" + AE No.*3 + "-" + M-NET address (001050)
<PI controller> "Address" + AE No.*3 + "-" + M-NET address (001050) + "-" + Metering device No. (14)
<Built-in Pulse Input (PI)> "Pulse input" + AE No.*3 + "-" + Channel No. (14)
<AI controller or AHC> "Address" + AE No.*3 + "-" + M-NET address (001050, 201250) + "-" + Sensor No. (12)
Group
Group name*2
Block
Block name*2
All Blocks
"All Blocks"
Energy management block
Energy management block name*2
Date range: Year
"Month", Display target (Bar), Comparison target (Bar), "Target electric energy[kWh]"*1, Display target (Line), Comparison target (Line)
Date range: Month
"Day", Display target (Bar), Comparison target (Bar), "Target electric energy[kWh]"*1, Display target (Line), Comparison target (Line)
Date range: Day
"Time", Display target (Bar), Comparison target (Bar), Display target (Line), Comparison target (Line)
4th Measurement item
The bar and line graph items that can be output vary with the display target/ comparison target.
V: Item that can be output; : Item that cannot be output
Display target/Comparison target
Bar graph
Line graph
Indoor unit
V
V
Built-in Pulse Input (PI)
V
Address
PI controller
V
AI controller
V
Group
V
V
Block
Block All Blocks
V
V
V
Energy management block
V
V
WT07996X12
75
Item
Description
File format
Row
Item
Date range
4th Measurement item
5th
*4
Data
Day Month Year
Format
The format of the display target and comparison target to be output is as follows. Address
<Indoor unit> "Address" + "-" + AE No.*3 + "-" + Address number + "-" + Display item (Bar/ Line)
<PI controller> "Address" + "-" + AE No.*3 + "-" + Address number + "-" + Metering device No. + "-" + Display item (Bar)
<Built-in Pulse Input (PI)> "Pulse input" + "-" + AE No.*3 + "-" + Channel No. + "-" + Display item (Bar)
<AI controller or AHC> "Address" + "-" + AE No.*3 + "-" + Address number + "-" + Sensor No. + "-" + Display item (Line)
Group Group name*2 + "-" + Display item (Bar/Line)
Block Block name*2 + "-" + Display item (Bar/Line)
All Blocks "All Blocks" + "-" + Display item (Bar)
Energy management block Energy management block name*2 + "-" + Display item (Bar/Line)
hh:mm, d, mm,
Data value (Bar), Comparison data value (Bar), Target electric energy value*1, Data value (Line), Comparison data value (Line)
*1 "Target electric energy(kWh)" and the target electric energy value will appear only when the data is displayed in the graph.
*2 If the group name has not been registered, ["Group" + AE No. + "-" + Group number] will appear. If the block name has not been registered, ["Block" + AE No. + "-" + Block number] will appear. If the energy management block name has not been registered, ["Energy mgmt block" + AE No. + "-" + Energy management block number] will appear.
*3 For AE No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. *4 The number of rows varies with the selected date range. (Day: 5th52nd; Month: 5th35th; Year: 5th16th) *5 When no item is selected as a display item/comparison item, "Target None" will appear.
Date range: Year
413 2015:2014 Administration Dpt./Block01-1-03 Month,Administration Dpt. - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Block01-1-03 - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh],Administration Dpt. - Outdoor Temp.[ºC],Block01-1-03 - Outdoor Temp.[ºC] 01,675.17,661.93,600,0.4,0.5 02,697.38,683.71,700,0.3,3.2 03,528.63,518.26,400,4.5,3.8 ...
File sample (Display range: Block)
Date range: Month
412 2015/04:2014/04 Administration Dpt./Block01-1-03 Day,Administration Dpt. - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Block01-1-03 - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh],Administration Dpt. - Outdoor Temp.[ºC],Block01-1-03 - Outdoor Temp.[ºC] 1,24.69,8.74,22,26.2,17.9 2,25.31,8.22,22,27,17.4 3,12.36,22.33,10,25.2,16.6 ...
Date range: Day
411 2015/08/19:2014/06/01 Administration Dpt./Block01-1-03 Time,Administration Dpt. - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Block01-1-03 - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Administration Dpt. - Outdoor Temp.[ºC],Block01-1-03 - Outdoor Temp.[ºC] 00:00,0.61,0.25,23.2,17.8 00:30,0.65,0.51,23.1,17.6 01:00,0.66,0.48,22.1,18.1 ...
WT07996X12
76
For building managers Chapter 2
2-2-2. Ranking
On the Ranking screen, the rankings in electric energy consumption, fan operation time, and Thermo-ON time (Total/ Cool/Heat) of given indoor units (connected to all centralized controllers that are under the control of the Integrated Centralized Control Web) can be displayed per block, group, unit address, and energy management block in descending order in the bar graph. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Ranking] to access the Ranking screen.
Note: "Energy Management License Pack" is required to access the Ranking screen. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only)
(1) Click [Display target] to set the display items.
Display target
Measurement unit/scale
Graph region Display item
Detailed information Mousing over the graph will display the values of the bar and line graphs.
Download Click to output the data in a CSV format. (This button is not displayed on a tablet.)
Display range
Date to display the data
Cancel Click to return to the previous screen without making any changes.
OK Click to confirm the changes and return to the previous screen.
Item Display target Display range
Date
Description
"Display range" and "date" to display a ranking graph are displayed.
Select [Block], [Group], [Address], or [Energy mgmt block] to display its data in a ranking graph.
Specify a date to display the data in a ranking graph. Click to display the screen to select "year", "month", or "day".
Note: When "year" is specified, specify "yyyy" from the last 5 years including the current year. When "month" is specified, specify "yyyy/mm" from the last 25 months including the current month. When "day" is specified, specify "yyyy/mm/dd" from the last 25 months including the current month.
Important: Only the data for the period during which the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was powered on will appear in the graph. The data for the period during which the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was powered off will not appear in the graph.
WT07996X12
77
Item Display item
Description Select an item to display its data in a ranking graph.
Note: The selectable items vary, depending on the item selected in the "Display range" field.
Display range
Display item
Address
Group
Block
Energy management block
Measurement The graph shows the measurement unit that is suitable for the selected display item, and scale that is
unit/scale
automatically adjusted to show the full range of data.
(2) Click [OK] to return to the previous screen. The graph will be created based on the specified criteria.
Item Ranking graph
Description Portion exceeding target value
Target value
Usage ratio for the target value
Graph region
Ranking
Name of the selected display range
Consumed amount
Portion remaining to target value
Note: Target value will appear only when [Energy mgmt block] or [Block] is selected. Note: Target value will not appear when the target value is not set or set to "0".
Detailed information
Mouse over the graph area to display the values on the graph for the area moused over on the graph area.
Graph value Target value
WT07996X12
78
For building managers Chapter 2
(3) To output the displayed ranking data in a CSV format, click [Download]. The file name and file format will vary as shown below, depending on the selected date range.
Item
Description
Date range: Year EM_AnnualRanking_[yyyy]_[Display range]_[Ranking graph type].csv
Date range: Month EM_MonthlyRanking_[yyyy]-[mm]_[Display range]_[Ranking graph type].csv
Date range: Day EM_DailyRanking_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[Display range]_[Ranking graph type].csv
File name File format
File-name contents [yyyy] [mm] [dd]
[Display range]
[Ranking graph type]
Format
The year specified in the [Date] field
The month specified in the [Date] field
The date specified in the [Date] field
Address
"A999"
Group
"G999"
Block
"B999"
Energy management block "E999"
B01: Indoor unit electric energy
B02: Fan operation time
B03: Thermo-ON time (Total)
B04: Thermo-ON time (Cool)
B05: Thermo-ON time (Heat)
Row Item
Date range
Format
Year
1st File Type Month
Day
Year
2nd Date
Month
Day
3rd Display range
4th Measurement item
5th 28th
Data
416 415 414 yyyy yyyy/mm yyyy/mm/dd Address Group Block Energy management block Address Group Block Energy management block Address Group Block Energy management block
"All Addresses" "All Groups" "All Blocks"
"All EM Blocks"
"Address number", Display item "Group name"*1, Display item "Block name"*1, Display item, "Target electric energy[kWh]"*2 "Ene Block name"*1, Display item, "Target electric energy[kWh]"*2 Address number, Data value Group name*1, Data value Block name*1, Data value, Target electric energy value*2 Energy management block name*1, Data value, Target electric energy value*2
*1 If the group name has not been registered, ["Group" + AE No. + "-" + group number] will appear. If the block name has not been registered, ["Block" + AE No. + "-" + block number] will appear. If the energy management block name has not been registered, ["Energy mgmt block" + AE No. + "-" + Energy management block number] will appear.
*2 "Target electric energy(kWh)" and the target electric energy value will appear only when the data is displayed in the graph.
WT07996X12
79
Item
Description
Date range: Year
416 2015 All Blocks Block name,Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh] Administration Dept.,9370.68,7886.4 Block01-1-03,7283.76,6744.36 Unregistered Blocks,6327.72,7339.56 Block01-01,4166.4,6286.8 Block03-01-10,2302.68,1949.28 Accounting Dept.,2224.56,4077.12
File sample (Display range: Block)
Date range: Month
415 2015/06 All Blocks Block name,Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh] Administration Dept.,780.89,657.2 Block01-1-03,606.98,562.03 Unregistered Blocks,527.31,611.63 Block01-01,347.2,523.9 Block03-01-10,191.89,162.44 Accounting Dept.,185.38,339.76
Date range: Day
414 2015/06/01 All Blocks Block name,Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh] Administration Dept.,25.19,21.2 Block01-1-03,19.58,18.13 Unregistered Blocks,17.01,19.73 Block01-01,11.2,16.9 Block03-01-10,6.19,5.24 Accounting Dept.,5.98,10.96
WT07996X12
80
2-2-3. Target Value
On the Target Value screen, target values that are displayed in the graph on the Energy Use Status screen and the Ranking screen can be checked. Target values will be set for each centralized controller. Here, target values for all centralized controllers that are managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web can be displayed. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Target Value] to access the Target Value screen.
Note: Target value settings can be configured on the AE-200/AE-50's LCD.
Total target value
For building managers Chapter 2
Monthly target
(1) Check the annual target electric energy value.
Comparison with previous year
Actual electric energy consumption of the previous year
Target value for each block
Annual target
Item
Description
Annual target electric energy
The annual target electric energy consumption value is displayed.
Actual electric energy consumption of the previous year
Comparison with previous year
The electric energy actually consumed in the previous year is displayed.
The ratio of the annual target electric energy of the current year to the electric energy consumed in the previous year is displayed.
Note: If there are results for the previous year, then at the new year, a comparison of the previous year's annual target electric energy and results will be displayed.
WT07996X12
81
(2) Check the target electric energy values for each month.
Monthly target electric energy
Item
Monthly target electric energy
Description
The monthly target electric energy for the air conditioning units within the Integrated Centralized Control Web is displayed.
(3) Check the target electric energy values for each block.
Annual target electric energy for each block
Block name
Item
Block name
Annual target electric energy for each block
Description The names of all the registered blocks are displayed.
Note: The blocks set for tenant manager management are displayed. Note: If the block name has not been registered, [AE No. + "Block" + Block number] is displayed.
The annual target electric energy values for each block will appear are displayed.
WT07996X12
82
For building managers Chapter 2
2-2-4. Peak Cut
The Peak Cut screen displays the average electric power consumption (30 minutes (demand value)) graph for each centralized controller, and the Peak Cut control level (0 to 4) graph. Confirmation of daily energy-saving status through shifts in demand values, maximum values, and shifts in control levels is possible. Additionally, by looking at Peak Cut control status, adjustment of control level settings values (electric power) is possible. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Peak Cut] to access the Peak Cut screen.
Note: A separate license is required to use the Peak Cut control.
Note: Peak Cut control settings are configured in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
Note: Average electric power consumption is based on the electric power consumed in 30-minute period (the first 30 minutes and the last 30 minutes of each hour) in the past.
Controller
Measurement date
Measurement unit/scale of average electric power
Average electric power (bar graph) Control level (line graph)
Control level scale
Time Download
(1) In the [Controller] section, select a centralized controller to display a Peak Cut control status graph. The measurement data of the specified measurement date will appear.
Item Controller
Description Select a centralized controller. Click to display the date selection screen, and select the measurement date.
Measurement date
Note: The data of the past 25 months including the current day can be displayed.
WT07996X12
83
Item
Description
Average electric power consumption (kW) will appear in 30-minute increments in a bar graph.
Average electric power
Note: Every hour on the hour, the average electric power for the previous 30 minutes (30 to 59 minutes) is displayed, and every hour on the half hour, the average electric power for the previous 30 minutes (00 to 29 minutes) is displayed.
Note: Average electric power consumption data are stored every hour and half hour. If a power failure occurs, up to 30-minute worth of data will be lost.
Note: The graph can be displayed only when the Peak Cut method is set to "Electric Amount Count PLC" or "PI Controller" in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods..
Control level Peak Cut control level will appear in a line graph.
(2) Click [Download] to output the measurement data in a CSV format
Note: This function cannot be used on a tablet.
Item
Description
Peakcut_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[AE No.].csv
File name File format
File-name contents
Format
[yyyy] [mm] [dd] [AE No.]
The year specified in [Measurement date] The month specified in [Measurement date] The date specified in [Measurement date] Centralized controller No. *1
*1 For centralized controller No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
Row
Item
1st File Type
2nd Date
3rd Target
4th Measurement item
5th Data
Format 123 yyyy/mm/dd "Peakcut energy" "Time,Power(kW),Control level" hh:mm (1-minute intervals), average electric power consumption, control level
Note: Average electric power consumption (kW) in 30-minute period will appear in 30-minute increments.
File sample
123 2015/06/01 Peakcut energy Time,Power(kW),Control level 00:00,12.73,1 00:01,12.73,1 00:02,12.73,1
: : 23:58,11.89,3 23:59,11.89,2
WT07996X12
84
For building managers Chapter 2
2-3. Schedule
Schedule function can be used to change the operation status of the air conditioning units automatically at a given time. Weekly (5 types), annual (5 types), and current day scheduling are available. Up to 24 events can be scheduled per day.
Note: When the schedules overlap, schedule with the highest priority will run as shown on the next page. (Today's schedule>Annual schedule>Weekly schedule 1 to 5)
Note: Schedules can be set for each unit group. Note: Set the [Schedule] setting on the operation settings screen for each unit group to [Available] to enable the scheduled events. Note: Schedule settings are based upon the set PC time, however, execution of scheduled tasks uses the time set on the
centralized controller. Ensure that the times set on the PC and on the centralized controller match before configuring settings. Refer to 2-5-3 [1] "Date and Time Settings" in Chapter 2 for details on ensuring these match.
2-3-1. Schedule setting example
SUN MON
34 10 11 17 18 24 25 31
Group 1
Aug
TUE WED THU FRI SAT
12
Group 2 Aug
FRI SAT
56789
12
12 313 4 14 515 6 16 7 8 9
19 1020 1121 1222313234 14 5 15 6 16 7
26 1727 1828 19291020301121 1222 1323 14 24 25 26 1727 1828 1929 2030 21
31
24 25 26 27 28
31
Group 3 Aug
FRI SAT
12 89 15 16 22 23 29 30
Days that Weekly Schedule runs Days that Annual Schedule runs Days that Today's Schedule runs
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Weekly schedule 1
(special)
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Weekly schedule 4
(winter)
Weekly schedule 2 (summer)
Weekly schedule 4
(winter)
Weekly schedule 5 (spring)
Weekly schedule 3 (autumn)
Note: The figure above shows the setting example of weekly schedules where the date period for each Weekly Schedule is set to the followings. Weekly Schedule 1: Aug 1 - Aug 20 Weekly Schedule 2: Jun 16 - Sep 15 Weekly Schedule 3: Sep 16 - Nov 15 Weekly Schedule 4: Nov 16 - Mar 15 Weekly Schedule 5: Mar 16 - Jun 15
Note: When any of the Weekly Schedules 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 overlap, the schedule with the lower number takes priority. For example, Weekly Schedule 1 takes precedence over Weekly Schedule 2.
WT07996X12
85
Today's schedule Schedules can be set for the current day without modifying the weekly or annual schedules.
Annual schedule Different schedules can be set for public holidays or summer vacation.
Weekly schedule 1 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 2 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 3 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 4 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 5 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Priority High Low
WT07996X12
86
For building managers Chapter 2
2-3-2. Scheduled Start
[1] AI-Smart Start Schedule To attain the set temperature at the scheduled start time, this function calculates the time required to attain the set temperature, using the past operation data (such as the outside temperature, room temperature, and set temperature) learned by AI and considering daily temperature variation, and performs pre-cooling or pre-heating operation with low power consumption.
Note: The AI-Smart Start Schedule function is usable only for air conditioning unit groups that contain outdoor units to be released in the future.
Note: To fully utilize the AI-Smart Start Schedule function, use it repeatedly for it to learn the operating conditions.
Note: The AI-Smart Start Schedule function learns the operating conditions for cooling and heating separately. Due to this, in the first year of its operation, at the change of the seasons where the operation mode is changed, the function may be unable to attain the set temperature by the scheduled start time.
Note: The AI-Smart Start Schedule function starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation up to 90 minutes before the scheduled start time. (When this function is used for the first time, it starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation 90 minutes before the scheduled start time.)
Note: Air conditioning unit groups that are stopped 90 minutes before the scheduled start time will perform pre-cooling/pre-heating operation. (Air conditioning unit groups that are operating 90 minutes before the scheduled start time will not perform precooling/pre-heating operation.)
Note: During pre-cooling/pre-heating operation, indoor units will operate at the maximum fan speed.
Note: Pre-cooling/pre-heating operation will be stopped by the following: - Changing the ON/OFF status - Changing the operation mode - Changing the set temperature - Changing the fan speed
Note: At the scheduled start time, the indoor units will operate according to the settings (set temperature, operation mode, air direction, and fan speed) set by the schedule setting. When the fan speed has not been set, the units continue operating at the maximum fan speed.
Note: When the remote control operation prohibition setting and the AI-Smart Start Schedule function are enabled at the same time, the remote control operation prohibition setting will be applied after the scheduled start time.
[2] Optimized Start Schedule To attain the set temperature at the scheduled start time, this function calculates the time required to attain the set temperature, based on the past operation data (such as the room temperature and set temperature), and performs pre-cooling or pre-heating operation.
Note: The Optimized Start Schedule function is usable with air conditioning unit groups and groups of LOSSNAY with heater/ humidifier.
Note: The Optimized Start Schedule function starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation up to 60 minutes before the scheduled start time. (When this function is used for the first time, it starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation 30 minutes before the scheduled start time.)
Note: When the remote control operation prohibition setting and the Optimized Start Schedule function are enabled at the same time, the remote control operation prohibition setting will be applied after the scheduled start time.
[3] Regular Schedule Units start operating at the scheduled start time set by the schedule setting.
WT07996X12
87
Concept of control by AI-Smart Start Schedule and Optimized Start Schedule <Example> Scheduled start time: 8:30, Operation mode: Heating, Set temperature: 20ºC
AI-Smart Start Schedule (example of control)
Optimized Start Schedule (example of control)
Operation status of the outdoor unit
Scheduled start time
Operation status of the outdoor unit
Scheduled start time
Regular operation
Energy-save operation
7:00
7:30
8:00
8:30
Concept of AI-Smart Start
Scheduled start time
20
Pre-heating
operation
Pre-heating
15
operation
starts at 7:20.
10
7:00
7:30
8:00
Regular operation
Set temperature 20ºC
Current room temperature 10ºC
8:30
Regular operation
Regular operation
7:00
7:30
8:00
8:30
Concept of Optimized Start
Scheduled start time
20 15
10 7:00
Pre-heating operation
Pre-heating operation starts at 7:40.
7:30
8:00
Regular operation
Set temperature 20ºC
Current room temperature 10ºC
8:30
<Example> Pre-heating operation starts at 7:20.
<Example> Pre-heating operation starts at 7:40.
Room temperature (ºC) Room temperature (ºC)
WT07996X12
88
For building managers Chapter 2
2-3-3. Weekly Schedule
Five types of weekly schedules (Weekly 1 to 5) can be set. Operations can be scheduled for each day of the week for each weekly schedule.
[1] Selecting a target to which the schedule will be applied In the Floor Layout screen or group list, select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied, and click [Schedule settings]. A screen to set a schedule for the selected group(s) will appear. Refer to section 2-1-4 "Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated" for how to select group icons.
Schedule (Floor Layout)
Schedule (Group list)
Schedule (HWHP)
Schedule (Chiller)
Schedule settings
Schedule (MEHT-CH&HP)
(1) Select [HWHP] to set the schedule for HWHP unit groups, select [Chiller] to set the schedule for chiller unit groups, select [MEHT-CH&HP] to set the schedule for MEHT-CH&HP unit groups, or select [Floor Layout] or [Show groups] to set the schedule for air conditioning unit groups.
(2) Select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied, and click [Schedule settings] in the taskbar.
Schedule settings
WT07996X12
89
(3) If different equipment types exist together, a screen to select an equipment type will appear. Select one of the equipment types to set the schedule.
(4) Select a setting method.
(A) To create a new schedule or to edit an existing schedule, click [Edit schedule contents] and click [OK].
(B) To create a schedule based on the existing setting of other group, select [Create based on other group], select the group whose schedule is to be based on, and click [OK]. The contents of the schedule that have been set for the selected group will appear on the screen that will appear next.
(A) Creating newly or editing Edit schedule contents
(B) Creating based on the setting of other group
Create based on other group
Select the group whose schedule is to be based on.
Note: If the group whose schedule is to be based on has no schedule settings, no contents of the schedule will appear on the screen that will appear next.
Note: Only the same type of equipment will appear as copy-source for HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) units. For example, when the setting target is CRHV or CAHV units, QAHV units will not appear in the list.
WT07996X12
90
For building managers Chapter 2
[2] Setting the date range for each schedule Five types of weekly schedules can be set. (One year is divided into the maximum of five periods.)
Note: The weekly schedule date ranges are set for each centralized controller (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). When the weekly schedule date ranges are set with Integrated Centralized Control Web, the same settings will be sent to all the centralized controllers that are control targets of Integrated Centralized Control Web.
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click [Weekly schedule].
(2) In the Weekly schedule settings screen, click [Date range].
(3) In the date range settings screen, enter the date ranges in which each weekly schedule (Weekly 1 to 5) will be effective.
Schedule settings (Month)
Weekly schedule settings
Date range setting
Weekly schedule Schedule settings (Week)
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Date range
Date range setting disabled
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Weekly schedule
Note: On the date range setting screen, check the checkbox ( ) to disable the date range setting of the checked weekly schedule. Note: If the "Schedule: Season setting" setting is set to "Not Available" in the initial settings, the date range settings cannot be used.
For initial settings, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings). Note: Ensure that the "Available" or "Not Available" settings for "Schedule: Season setting" for all connected centralized controllers
match.
WT07996X12
91
[3] Selecting a day of the week Schedules can be set for each day of the week for each weekly schedule (Weekly 1 to 5).
(1) In the Schedule settings screen, select one of the weekly schedule (Weekly 1 to 5).
(2) Click the day to set the schedule. A screen to edit the schedules of the selected weekly schedule and the selected day of the week will appear.
Weekly 15 Select the weekly schedule to set the
schedule.
Weekly schedule
Day of the week The selected day
of the week will appear.
Edit schedule settings
Weekly 15 The selected weekly schedule will appear.
Day-of-the-week selection
Select the day to set the schedule.
Simplified display The simple schedule contents for each day of the week will appear.
Simplified display The simple schedule contents will appear.
Schedule contents
[4] Creating or changing the schedule contents
(1) In the Edit schedule settings screen, click [Add] to create a new schedule, or click [Edit] to change an existing schedule. A schedule contents settings screen will appear.
Edit schedule settings
Edit Click to change an existing schedule contents.
Add Click to create a new schedule.
WT07996X12
92
For building managers Chapter 2
(2) In the schedule contents settings screen, set the start time to apply to the schedule, set the operations to be scheduled, and then click [OK]. If [Optimized Start] or [AI Start] is selected, the operation mode and the set temperature need to be set as well.
Scheduled start time
Schedule contents settings (1/2)
Delete Click to delete the settings.
Schedule contents settings (2/2)
Scheduled start time
Delete Click to delete the settings.
OK
Click to confirm
Cancel
the settings.
Click to undo the changes made
and close the settings screen.
OK
Click to
Cancel Click to cancel the settings
confirm the settings.
and close the settings screen.
(3) After all schedule settings are completed, click [OK] on the Edit schedule settings screen.
Schedule settings
Cancel Click to undo the changes
made and close the Edit schedule settings screen.
OK Click to confirm the settings.
Note: When setting a schedule for a block or all groups collectively, all operation modes are available for selection, but the available operation modes depend on the unit model. The units will not operate in the selected mode not supported by the units.
Note: No need to set schedules for all operations. Set one or more necessary operations. Note: The operation items that will appear on the screen vary, depending on the equipment type. Note: For details about settings of each operation, refer to section 2-1-5 "Advanced settings". Note: Refer to section 2-3-2 "Scheduled Start" for details about Optimized Start Schedule function and AI-Smart Start Schedule
function.
WT07996X12
93
[5] Saving the schedules (1) After the schedule settings are completed, click [Send] on the Schedule settings screen to send and save the settings to the centralized controllers. To undo the changes made, click [Cancel].
Schedule settings
Cancel Click to undo the changes made and close the Schedule
settings screen.
Send Click to save the settings.
Note: Clicking [Send] will send the schedule settings to the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). It may take a few minutes to complete the transmission, depending on the volume of the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
94
For building managers Chapter 2
2-3-4. Annual Schedule
Schedules can be set for public holidays or summer vacation. Up to five operation patterns (Pattern 1 to 5) can be set for the 24 months including the current month, and total of 50 days can be allocated to the patterns. [1] Selecting a target to which the schedule will be applied
(1) In the Floor Layout screen or group list, select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied. Refer to [1] in 2-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
[2] Selecting a schedule pattern Up to five operation patterns can be set.
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click [Annual schedule pattern].
(2) In the pattern settings screen, select a schedule pattern to set the schedule.
(3) An Edit schedule settings screen will appear.
Schedule Setting (Month)
Pattern settings
Edit schedule settings (Pattern)
Annual schedule pattern
Pattern selection Select a pattern to set the schedule.
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Schedule contents
Simplified display The simple schedule contents for each pattern will appear.
Simplified display The simple schedule contents for each pattern will appear.
Pattern to set the schedule
[3] Creating or changing the schedule contents
(1) In the Edit schedule settings screen, set the start time to apply to the schedule, set the operations to be scheduled, and then click [OK]. Refer to [4] in 2-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
WT07996X12
95
[4] Allocating schedule patterns to special dates Each schedule pattern can be allocated to the specified dates such as public holidays and summer vacation.
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click the date to set a pattern.
(2) Select the pattern to be allocated to the selected date.
Schedule settings (Month)
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Date Click the date to
set a pattern.
Number of allocated patterns
Pattern selection Select a pattern to set the schedule.
[5] Saving the schedules (1) After the schedule settings are completed, click [Send] on the Schedule settings screen to send and save the settings to the centralized controllers. To undo the changes made, click [Cancel].
Schedule settings
Cancel Click to undo the changes made and close the Schedule
settings screen.
Send Click to save the settings.
Note: Clicking [Send] will send the schedule settings to the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). It may take a few minutes to complete the transmission, depending on the volume of the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
96
For building managers Chapter 2
2-3-5. Today's Schedule
Schedules can be set for the current day without modifying the weekly or annual schedules.
Note: Even if the today's schedule for a given day is deleted, the weekly or annual schedule set for the day will not run.
[1] Selecting a target to which the schedule will be applied
(1) In the Floor Layout screen or group list, select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied. Refer to [1] in 2-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
[2] Setting or changing the contents of the schedule
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click the date of the current day. The current day is displayed with a blue frame.
(2) Click [Today's schedule settings].
(3) In the Edit schedule settings screen, set the start time to apply to the schedule, set the operations to be scheduled, and then click [OK]. Refer to [4] in 2-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
Note: In the Schedule settings screen, "Today" ( schedule is set.
) is displayed on the date of the current day to which Today's
Schedule settings (Month)
Edit schedule settings (Today)
Current day Click the current day.
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Today's schedule settings
[3] Saving the schedules (1) After the schedule settings are completed, click [Send] on the Schedule settings screen to send and save the settings to the centralized controllers. To undo the changes made, click [Cancel].
Schedule settings
Today's schedule set
Cancel Click to undo the changes made and close the Schedule
settings screen.
Send Click to save the settings.
Note: Clicking [Send] will send the schedule settings to the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). It may take a few minutes to complete the transmission, depending on the volume of the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
97
2-3-6. Copying existing settings, or creating a schedule based on other settings
[1] Copying existing settings of other group The schedule settings can be copied among groups. (1) Air conditioning unit group
(1) In the Floor Layout screen or group list, select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied, and then click [Copy] in the taskbar.
(2) The schedule contents of the selected group will be copied, and the group icon will appear with an orange frame.
(3) Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted, and click [Paste]. The name of the group whose schedule settings have been copied appears under the [Copy] button.
· Floor Layout screen Procedure (1)
Procedure (2)
Procedure (3)
Copy Click to copy the schedule contents of the selected group.
Group icon Select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied.
Copied The group icon
will appear with an orange
frame.
Name of the group whose schedule
settings are copied
Paste Click to paste the
copied settings.
Group icon Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted.
· Group list Procedure (1)
Procedure (2)
Procedure (3)
Copy Click to copy the schedule contents of the selected group.
Group icon Select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied.
Copied The group icon
will appear with an orange
frame.
Name of the group whose schedule
settings are copied
Paste Click to paste the
copied settings.
Group icon Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted.
Note: Schedules of a group may not be precisely copied to a different type of group. When the group whose operation mode is set to "Optimized Start" is copied to the outlet air temperature control unit, the operation ON/OFF setting will be "ON."
WT07996X12
98
For building managers Chapter 2
(2) HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV), chiller unit group, and MEHT-CH&HP unit group
Procedure (1)
Procedure (2)
Procedure (3)
Copy Click to copy the schedule contents of the selected group.
Group icon Select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied.
Copied The group icon
will appear with an orange
frame.
Name of the group whose schedule
settings are copied
Paste Click to paste the
copied settings.
Group icon Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted.
Note: Schedules can be copied between CRHV and CAHV unit groups, but cannot be copied between CRHV/CAHV and QAHV unit groups.
Note: Schedules of a QAHV unit group cannot be copied to two or more QAHV unit groups at the same time.
WT07996X12
99
[2] Creating a schedule based on existing settings of other pattern/day of the week When setting annual schedule patterns or setting schedules for each day of the week for weekly schedule, the schedule settings can be created based on existing settings of other pattern or other day of the week.
(1) In the Edit schedule settings screen, click [Based on...].
(2) In the [Based on...] screen, select the pattern or the day of the week whose schedule is to be based on.
(3) The contents of the schedule that have been set for the selected pattern or the day of the week will appear in the Edit schedule settings screen.
(4) Add or change the schedule contents, if necessary.
· Annual schedule Edit schedule settings (pattern settings)
Pattern selection
Edit schedule settings (pattern settings)
Pattern to set the schedule
Based on existing settings of other pattern
· Weekly schedule
Pattern Select the pattern whose schedule is to be
based on.
Schedule contents The contents of the schedule that have
been set for the selected pattern will
appear.
Edit Click to edit the schedule contents.
Add Click to add the schedule contents.
Edit schedule settings (weekly schedule settings)
Edit schedule settings (weekly schedule settings)
Day-of-the-week selection
Day of the week to set the schedule
Based on existing settings of other day of the week
Day of the week Select the day of the week whose schedule is
to be based on.
Schedule contents The contents of the schedule that have
been set for the selected day of the
week will appear.
Edit Click to edit the schedule contents.
Add Click to add the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
100
For building managers Chapter 2
2-4. Notice 2-4-1. Error List
Click [Notice] in the menu, and then click [Error List] to access the Error List screen. A list of units that are currently malfunctioning will appear.
Group name
Unit address
Reset All Click to reset all displayed errors of the selected centralized controller at once. Controller Click to narrow down the units in error to display into centralized controller units.
Reset Click to reset each AHC error.
Error code
Buzzer icon
Item Controller Reset All Group name Unit address Buzzer icon
Error code
Description
Display target units can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller. Click to reset the errors at once.
Note: The units whose error has been reset will stop. Note: Only the errors of the centralized controller selected in [Controller] will be reset. The name of the group that the unit in error belongs to will appear. Note: The group name will not be displayed if the unit in error is a unit such as an outdoor
unit or a system controller. The centralized controller No. and address of the unit in error will appear.
Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. The buzzer icon will appear for all units in error.
Note: The icon will appear only when the error notification function is enabled in 2-5-1 "Screen display settings".
The error code that corresponds to the error will appear. Click the error code to display the definition.
Reset
Click to reset each AHC error.
WT07996X12
101
2-4-2. Unit error log
Click [Notice] in the menu, and then click [Unit error log] to access the Unit error log screen.
Note: The latest 64 unit errors will appear for each AE-200/AE-50/EW-50. Note: Unit errors of all AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 controllers will appear in a list.
Group name
Clear log Click to clear the displayed error log of the selected centralized controller.
Controller Click to narrow down the unit error log to display into centralized controller units.
Error source unit address Error detection unit address
Item Controller Clear log
Error code
Error code
Error occurrence date and time Error recovery date and time
Description Display target error log can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller. Click to clear the displayed unit error log of the centralized controller selected in [Controller]. The error code that corresponds to the error will appear. Click the error code to display the definition.
Error source unit address
Error detection unit address Error occurrence date and time Error recovery date and time
The centralized controller No. and address of the unit in error will appear. Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
The address of the unit that detected the error will appear. The date and time when the error occurred will appear.
The date and time when the error was resolved will appear.
WT07996X12
102
For building managers Chapter 2
2-4-3. Communication error log
Click [Notice] in the menu, and then click [Communication error log] to access the Communication error log screen.
Note: The latest 64 communication errors are displayed for each AE-200/AE-50/EW-50. Note: Communication errors of all AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 controllers will appear in a list. Note: Communication errors between the centralized controller and the PC will not appear.
Group name
Clear log Click to clear the displayed error log of the selected centralized controller.
Controller Click to narrow down the communication error log to display into centralized controller units.
Error source unit address
Error detection unit address
Error code
Error occurrence date and time
Error recovery date and time
Item Controller
Clear log
Description
Display target error log can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller.
Click to clear the displayed communication error log of the centralized controller selected in [Controller].
The error code that corresponds to the error will appear. Click the error code to display the definition.
Error code
Error source unit address
Error detection unit address Error occurrence date and time Error recovery date and time
The centralized controller No. and address of the unit in error will appear. Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
The address of the unit that detected the error will appear. The date and time when the error occurred will appear.
The date and time when the error was resolved will appear.
WT07996X12
103
2-4-4. Filter sign
A list of units whose filter sign is turned on can be displayed. Click [Notice] in the menu, and then click [Filter sign] to access the Filter sign screen.
Group name
Reset All Click to reset all displayed filter signs of the selected centralized controller at once.
Controller Click to narrow down the units to display into centralized controller units.
Unit address
Reset Click to reset each filter sign.
Item Controller Group name Unit address
Reset
Reset All
Description
Display target unit groups can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller.
The name of the group that the unit whose filter sign is turned on belongs to will appear.
The centralized controller No. and address of the unit whose filter sign is turned on will appear.
Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
Click to reset the filter sign of the group that the unit whose filter sign is turned on belongs to.
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter. Note: The cumulative filter usage time for the units without the indication of filter sign can
be reset from the Advanced settings screen. (Refer to 2-1-6 "Resetting the cumulative filter usage time".)
Click to reset all filter signs of the centralized controller selected in [Controller] at once. Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter. Note: After the filter signs are reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on the local remote controllers. When the filter signs are reset from the local remote controllers, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on this screen.
WT07996X12
104
2-5. Settings
Click [Settings] in the menu to configure screen display settings, user registration, and other initial settings.
For building managers Chapter 2
Screen display settings
User registration Initial settings
Function settings
Ventilation settings
Setting item Notice display on Home screen Energy display on Home screen Display order of block/group/ address Error warning Initial display screen Building manager Tenant manager General user Date and Time Settings License Registration E-Mail Peak Cut Set Temperature Range Limit
Night Mode Schedule
External Temperature Interlock
Night Setback Control
Night purge
Description
Set whether or not to display "Notice" on the Home screen. Set whether or not to display "Energy Use Status" on the Home screen. Set whether the unit groups are displayed on the screen in the order of their addresses or names. The error notification function can be enabled or disabled. Select "Home" or "Monitor/Operation" screen to display right after the log in. Set login ID and password for a building manager. Set login IDs, passwords, and management unit groups for tenant managers. Set login IDs, passwords, and management unit groups for general users. Set the date and time for the centralized controllers that are managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Register licences to activate various functions. Set to use the error notification e-mail function or the e-mail communication function. Set the control contents for each Peak Cut method or demand level. Set to limit the settable temperature range for the local remote controllers or the Web Browser for User. Set to operate the outdoor units in a quiet mode for the specified time period. Set to automatically adjust the set temperature based on the temperature difference between the set temperature and the outdoor temperature. Set to perform cooling or heating operation automatically when the room temperature goes outside of the specific range during the night. Set to draw cooler outside air into the room to suppress temperature rises at night.
2-5-1. Screen display settings
In [Screen display settings], configure the display settings.
Notice display on Home screen Set whether or not to display "Notice" on the Home screen.
Energy display on Home screen Set whether or not to display "Energy Use Status" on the Home screen.
Display order of block/group/address Set whether the unit groups are displayed on the screen in the order of their addresses or names.
Error warning The error notification function can be enabled or disabled.
Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the screen display
settings screen.
OK Click to save the settings.
Initial display screen Select "Home" or "Monitor/Operation" screen to display right after the log in.
WT07996X12
105
[1] Notice display on Home screen Set whether or not to display "Notice" on the Home screen. The factory default setting is "Show."
When set to "Show"
When set to "Hide"
[2] Energy display on Home screen Regarding the energy information display on the Home screen, select "Yearly," "Monthly," "Daily," or "Hide." The factory default setting is "Daily."
When set to "Yearly"
When set to "Monthly"
When set to "Daily"
When set to "Hide"
Note: Home screen display will vary, depending on the "Notice display" and "Energy display" settings.
No.
"Notice display" setting
(1)
Show
(2)
Show
(3)
Hide
(4)
Hide
"Energy display" setting Show (Yearly/Monthly/Daily)
Hide Show (Yearly/Monthly/Daily)
Hide
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
[3] Display order of block/group/address Set whether the unit groups are displayed on the screen in the order of their addresses or names. The factory default setting is "Number."
When set to "Number"
When set to "Name"
Displayed in the order of address numbers
Displayed in the order of group names
WT07996X12
106
For building managers Chapter 2
[4] Error warning The error notification function can be enabled or disabled. This function is disabled by default.
Note: When this function is enabled, warnings on communication errors and other types of errors on all units will be indicated.
Disabled
Home screen
Error status screen
Enabled
Home screen
Error status screen
WT07996X12
107
[5] Initial display screen Select "Home" or "Monitor/Operation" screen to display right after the log in.
Note: Notice and electric energy consumption are displayed only on the Home screen.
Home screen
Floor Layout screen
Show groups screen
HWHP screen
Chiller screen
MEHT-CH&HP screen
Measurement Status screen
AHC Status screen
WT07996X12
108
2-5-2. User registration
Login IDs and passwords for a building manager and a maintenance user can be set. Also, login IDs, passwords, and management unit groups for tenant managers and general users can be set.
Note: A separate license is required to register tenant managers and general users.
For building managers Chapter 2
Note: The available functions differ depending on the user that logs in.
Function
Building Tenant General manager manager user
Home screen
V
Floor Layout
V
Show groups
V
HWHP
V
Chiller
V
MEHT-CH&HP
V
Measurement Status
V
AHC Status
V
Advanced settings
V
Energy Use Status
V
Ranking
V
Target Value
V
Peak Cut
V
Schedule
V
Weekly schedule date range settings
V
Error List
V
Unit error log/Communication error log
V
Filter sign
V
Screen display settings
V
User registration
V
Date and time settings
V
License registration
V
E-Mail
V
Peak Cut
V
Set Temperature Range Limit
V
Night Mode Schedule
V
External Temperature Interlock
V
Night Setback Control
V
Night purge setting
V
Send Mail Log
V
Outdoor Unit Status
V
Free Contact
V
Gas Refrigerant Amount Check
V
CSV Output
V
Utility
V
Initialize Learning Data for AI-Smart Start
V
*1 Tenant managers and general users cannot monitor and operate the QAHV units. *2 Chiller units, MEHT-CH&HP units, and HWHP units cannot be monitored or operated on the smartphone.
WT07996X12
109
V
V
V*1
V*1*2
V
V*2
V
V*2
V
V
V
V
V
V
[1] Maintenance user In the maintenance user registration screen, user ID and password for a maintenance user can be set.
Maintenance user list
Edit Click to change the settings.
Maintenance user registration
User ID Password
OK Click to save the settings. Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the maintenance user list screen.
OK Click to confirm the settings. Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the maintenance user registration screen.
Controller Click to narrow down the unit groups to display into centralized controller units.
WT07996X12
110
For building managers Chapter 2
(1) Click [Edit] to display the maintenance user registration screen.
(2) In the maintenance user registration screen, enter the user ID and password for a maintenance user, and then click [OK].
Note: A maintenance user is a user who has access to the maintenance tools such as the Initial Setting Tool and the CSV Download Tool.
Note: It is recommended to change the default user name and password so that the users other than the maintenance users will not be able to change the settings. Refer to 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2 for how to change the default user name and password.
Note: If the default maintenance user name and password were changed, the changed user name and the password will remain active after the controller is updated to a newer version. Also, if you import the backup data of the changed settings to another AE-200/EW-50, the changed user name and the password will remain active.
AE-200E/EW-50E (All versions)
User
Default user name
Maintenance user initial
Default password init
AE-200A/EW-50A (Ver. 7.97 and earlier)
User
Default user name
Maintenance user initial
Default password init
AE-200A/EW-50A (Ver. 7.98 and later)
User
Default user name
Maintenance user
initial
Default password*1*2 in "Serial number"
Example default password (Serial number: 19672-123*3)
in19672123
*1 Default password for AE-200A/EW-50A updated to Ver. 7.98 or later from Ver. 7.97 or earlier The default password varies with the version immediately before the update. Default password for AE-200A/EW-50A when updated from a version earlier than Ver. 7.98
Version before the update Ver. 7.107.12 Ver. 7.237.97
Default password after the system has been updated to Ver. 7.98 or later in "Serial number" init
*2 Default password for AE-200A/EW-50A to which the backup data from Ver. 7.98 or later was imported If the settings data are backed up from the AE-200A/EW-50A that was logged in with the default password and are imported to the AE-200A/EW-50A Ver. 7.98 or later, the new password will be the serial number of the AE-200A/EW-50A to which the data was imported.
AE-200A/EW-50A Software version: 7.98 Serial number: 31C71-101 Password of maintenance user: in31C71101
AE-200A/EW-50A Software version: 7.98 Serial number: 19272-124 Password of maintenance user: in19272124
Export backup data
USB
Import backup data
*3 On Ver. 7.98 and later, serial number can be found on the login screen of the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Refer to section 3-1 "Logging in from the PC/tablet".
Note: The user name and password are case-sensitive. The password must be within 19 alphanumeric characters.
WT07996X12
111
[2] Building manager In the building manager registration screen, user ID, user name, and password for a building manager can be set.
Building manager list
User ID
Edit Click to change the settings.
Building manager registration
User name
Password
Number of controlled units for each equipment type
Unit groups connected to the selected centralized controller
OK Click to save the settings. Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the building manager list screen.
OK Click to confirm the settings. Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the building manager registration screen.
Controller Click to narrow down the unit groups to display into centralized controller units.
(1) Click [Edit] to display the building manager registration screen.
(2) In the building manager registration screen, enter the user ID, user name, and password for a building manager, and then click [OK].
Note: One building manager can be registered for an air conditioning system that are managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Note: The accessible unit groups for building managers cannot be specified because building managers can monitor and operate all unit groups.
Note: The user name and password are case-sensitive. The password must be in 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters.
Note: User ID and password are required to log in.
Note: The user name and password used for the Integrated Centralized Control Web are different from the ones used for the LCD or the Web Browser for Initial Settings.
WT07996X12
112
For building managers Chapter 2
[3] Tenant manager and general user In the tenant manager registration screen, up to 200 tenant managers can be registered. In the general user registration screen, up to 2,000 general users can be registered. Set the unit groups that can be monitored and operated by each user.
Note: After creating a tenant manager and general user, contact the users with their user ID, password, and login URL.
Note: The user name and password used for the Integrated Centralized Control Web are different from the ones used for the LCD or the Web Browser for Initial Settings.
Note: Tenant managers and general users cannot monitor and operate the QAHV units.
Note: "Other equipment" in the "Number of controlled units for each equipment type" section includes HWHP, chiller units, and MEHT-CH&HP units.
Tenant manager list
User ID
Edit Click to change the settings.
Tenant manager registration
Delete Click to delete the displayed user.
User name Password
Number of controlled units for each equipment type
Unit groups connected to the selected centralized controller
Registered tenant managers
OK Click to save the settings. Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the tenant manager list screen.
Add Click to add a tenant manager.
OK
Cancel
Click to confirm the settings.
Click to cancel the settings and close the
tenant manager registration screen.
Controller Click to narrow down the unit groups to display into centralized controller units.
(1) Click [Add] to register a new tenant manager/general user, or click [Edit] to change the existing tenant manager/general user settings. The user registration screen will appear.
(2) In the user registration screen, enter the user ID, user name, and password, select the accessible unit groups, and then click [OK].
Note: Only the unit groups specified here will be accessible when logged in with tenant manager/general user privileges. Note: The user name and password are case-sensitive. The password must be in 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. Note: User ID and password are required to log in. Note: General user name will be displayed when a smartphone is used.
General user name
WT07996X12
113
2-5-3. Initial settings
In [Initial settings], date and time settings can be configured and licenses can be registered.
Date and Time Settings Set the date and time for the centralized controllers that are managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web.
License Registration Register licenses.
[1] Date and Time Settings
In [Date and Time Settings], the current date and time of the login destination centralized controller can be acquired
and the current date and time can be set for all centralized controllers.
Enter the current date and time, and click [OK] to save the settings to the centralized controllers.
Date and time of the centralized controller
The current date and time of the login destination centralized
controller appear.
Date settings Enter the current date.
Time settings Enter the current time.
Daylight saving time setting
Click to enable the daylight saving time
setting.
Refresh Click to acquire the current date and time of the login destination centralized controller.
(1) Enter the current date and time.
Cancel Click to cancel the settings and close the date and time settings screen.
OK Click to save the settings.
(2) To adjust the daylight saving time automatically, check the [Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes] checkbox, click [Custom settings] on the left, and select the applicable country.
If the applicable country is not there, select [Custom settings] on the right instead to open the Custom settings screen, and configure the daylight saving time setting.
Note: The date and time set on this screen will be sent to all AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 controllers that are managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web, and be reflected to all air conditioning units connected to them.
Note: Schedule settings are sent to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50, based on the time of the PC that uses the Integrated Centralized Control Web. If the current time is moved forward on this screen and the time differs from the PC time, the operation that was scheduled to take place during the time that was skipped will not be performed.
Note: When the daylight saving time is set, time difference may occur between the centralized controllers AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 and the PC, adversely affecting the schedule settings and energy management function. When setting the daylight saving time, be sure to set the same time for the PC time.
WT07996X12
114
For building managers Chapter 2
[2] License Registration In [License Registration], register licenses for optional functions. Please ask your dealer for how to purchase a license for optional functions.
Note: The license registration is required for all connected centralized controllers AE-200/AE-50/EW-50. Switch the centralized controller in [Controller] to register the license respectively.
Optional function Select the optional function to be
registered.
Current status This indicates whether the optional function is available for
use.
Model name and software version
Controller Select a centralized controller to which the license is registered.
License number entry field
Register Click to register the license.
(1) In [Optional function], select the optional function to be registered. The current availability will appear in the "Current status" section.
(2) In [License number entry field], enter the license number and click [Register]. In "Current status", "Available" will appear. If the registration is unsuccessful, verify that the selected optional function and the license number are correct.
Note: Alphabet "O" and "I" are not used for license number.
2-6. Function settings
Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
2-7. Ventilation settings
Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
WT07996X12
115
2-8. Maintenance
Click [Maintenance] in the menu to check various maintenance settings.
Setting item Send Mail Log
Monitoring Status
Outdoor Unit Status Free Contact
Gas Refrigerant Amount Check
CSV Output
Utility
Initialize Learning Data for AI-Smart Start
Description A list of error notification e-mail that have been sent can be checked. (E-mail settings must be configured in the initial settings.) Capacity value and refrigerant discharge/suction pressures of outdoor units can be checked. Input/output status of free contacts on the indoor units can be checked. Gas refrigerant amount can be checked. Operation data of air conditioning units for each centralized controller can be output in a CSV format.
Note: This button is not displayed on a tablet. The settings data can be backed up and imported.
Learning data created based on past data can be reset.
WT07996X12
116
For building managers Chapter 2
2-8-1. Send Mail Log
In [Send Mail Log], a list of error notification e-mail that have been sent can be checked. Error notification e-mail function is the function to send the error information to the specified e-mail addresses. To use this function, e-mail settings must be configured in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Error code
Controller Click to narrow down the e-mail log to display into centralized controller units.
Error source unit address
Clear log Click to clear all displayed e-mail log of the selected centralized controller at once.
Sent Mail Status
Sent date and time
Error Status
Item Controller Clear log Sent date and time
Error source unit address
Error code Error Status Sent Mail Status
Description
Display target e-mail logs can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller. Click to clear the e-mail log.
Note: Only the e-mail log of the centralized controller selected in [Controller] will be reset. To clear all logs, select "All controllers."
The date and time when the e-mail was sent will appear. The centralized controller No. and address of the error source unit will appear.
Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. Note: When an error occurs on the general equipment connected via DIDO controller (PAC-
YG66DCA), the address of the DIDO controller will appear.
The error code that corresponds to the error will appear. Occurred: The e-mail was sent when an error occurred. Resolved: The e-mail was sent when the error was resolved. Sent: The e-mail was successfully sent. Failed: The e-mail failed to be sent.
WT07996X12
117
2-8-2. Monitoring Status
In [Monitoring Status], "Outdoor Unit Status" and "Free Contact" can be checked.
[1] Outdoor Unit Status In the Outdoor Unit Status screen, operators can check the capacity value, high pressure, and low pressure of each outdoor unit. Click [Monitoring Status], and then click [Outdoor Unit Status].
Note: If AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 is started up with the outdoor units turned off, outdoor unit status may not appear. In this case, restart the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
Controller Click to narrow down the outdoor units to display into centralized controller units.
Outdoor unit icon Outdoor unit address
High pressure Low pressure
Capacity Value
Item Controller
Capacity Value
High Pressure Low Pressure
Description Display target outdoor units can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller. The capacity value of the compressor on a given outdoor unit will appear.
Note: The capacity value of a sub outdoor unit will not appear. Refrigerant discharge pressure of the compressor on a given outdoor unit will appear. Refrigerant suction pressure of the compressor on a given outdoor unit will appear.
Outdoor unit icon
: Normal : Communication error or unit error
Outdoor unit address
The centralized controller No. and address of the outdoor unit will appear. Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
* When a communication error occurs, "--" will appear in the Capacity Value, High Pressure, and Low Pressure value fields. * If the outdoor unit is a PUMY model of City Multi S-series, "--" will appear in the Capacity Value, High Pressure, and Low Pressure value
fields. * If the outdoor unit does not support a capacity display, "--" will appear in the Capacity Value field.
WT07996X12
118
For building managers Chapter 2
[2] Free Contact The input/output status of free contacts on the indoor units can be checked. Click [Monitoring Status], and then click [Free Contact].
Note: The indoor unit free contact settings must be made with the dipswitches on the indoor unit.
Controller Click to narrow down the indoor unit free contact status to display into centralized controller units.
Output Status
Indoor unit icon Indoor unit address
Input Status
Item Controller Input Status Output Status
Indoor unit icon
Indoor unit address
Description Display target indoor unit free contact status can be narrowed down by selecting a centralized controller. The input status (ON or OFF) of the free contacts CN32-2, CN32-3, CN51-2, and CN52-5 on the indoor unit will appear. The output status (ON or OFF) of the free contacts CN52-2, CN52-3, and CN52-4 on the indoor unit will appear.
: Normal
: Communication error or unit error
The centralized controller No. and address of the indoor unit will appear. Note: For address display, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
WT07996X12
119
2-8-3. Gas Refrigerant Amount Check
On the Gas Refrigerant Amount Check screen, operators can check the outdoor units for proper gas refrigerant charge.
Note: Only the outdoor units that support the Gas Refrigerant Amount Check function will appear on the screen.
Note: During the Gas Refrigerant Amount Check, outdoor units will operate in a cool mode. The check will take between 30 minutes and 1 hour.
Note: Refer to the outdoor unit installation manual as regards the inspection methods right after installation of outdoor unit and when carrying out maintenance, as well as cautions.
Controller Click to narrow down the units to display into centralized controller units.
M-NET address of the outdoor unit
Log Up to the last 10 check logs will appear. The date and time when each check ended and its check result
will appear.
Check Result Normal, Low, or Unmeasurable will appear.
Check All Click to start checking the gas refrigerant charge on all displayed outdoor units.
Schedule for check The preset schedule for the check will appear.
Start checking Click to start checking the gas refrigerant charge for a given outdoor unit.
Edit Click to display the schedule settings screen.
Download Click to output the check log data in a CSV format. (This button is not displayed on a tablet.)
[1] Manual operation The procedure for how to manually check the gas refrigerant amount is as follows.
(1) To start a check for all outdoor units, click [Check All]. To start a check for a given outdoor unit, click [Start checking] in the row of the outdoor unit to be checked. The [Start checking] button will change to [Cancel checking] button when clicked. To stop the check, click [Cancel checking].
(2) The check will take between 30 minutes and 1 hour. Upon completion, check result will appear. Normal: Gas refrigerant charge is appropriate. Low: Gas refrigerant charge is low. Unmeasurable: Gas refrigerant charge cannot be measured.
Note: The screen can be closed before a check is completed. The check results will be displayed next time this screen is opened.
Note: When "Low" is displayed in Check Result, contact your dealer or a manufacturer-specified service company.
[2] Scheduled operation The procedure for how to automatically check the gas refrigerant amount according to the specified schedule is as follows.
(1) Touch the [Edit] button for a given unit address to set the schedule.
(2) A screen to select the setting method will appear. (A) To create a new schedule or to edit an existing schedule, click [Edit schedule contents] and click [OK]. (B) To create a schedule based on the existing setting of other address, select [Create based on other address], select the group whose schedule is to be based on, and click [OK]. The contents of the schedule that have been set for the selected address will appear on the screen that will appear next.
WT07996X12
120
For building managers Chapter 2
(A) Creating newly or editing Edit schedule contents
(B) Creating based on the setting of other address
Create based on other address
Select the address whose schedule is to be based on.
Note: If the address whose schedule is to be based on has no schedule settings, no contents of the schedule will appear on the screen that will appear next.
(3) In the Edit schedule settings screen, click [Add] to create a new schedule, or click [Edit] to change an existing schedule. A schedule contents settings screen will appear.
Note: Up to 16 schedules can be set.
Edit schedule settings
Edit Click to change an existing schedule contents.
Add Click to create a new schedule.
(4) Set the date and time at which you want to perform the gas refrigerant amount check, and touch [OK].
Note: The gas refrigerant amount check will not be performed while the outdoor unit is in operation. Set the time at which the outdoor unit is stopped.
Schedule contents settings
Scheduled start date
Delete Click to delete the settings.
Scheduled start time
Cancel Click to undo the changes made
and close the settings screen.
OK Click to confirm the settings.
Note: If multiple scheduled checks are performed at the same time, the power consumption may exceed the contract power. It is recommended to shift the start time settings among addresses.
WT07996X12
121
[3] Downloading the check log data The check log data for the displayed units can be output in the CSV format. The CSV file can be output for the selected controller.
Note: This function is not available on a tablet.
Item
Description
File name
<For AE-200> "OC"_"RefrigerantCharge"_[YYYY]-[MM]-[DD]_"AE"[AE-200 No.].csv
<For AE-50/EW-50> "OC"_"RefrigerantCharge"_[YYYY]-[MM]-[DD]_"AE"[AE-200 (Main) No.]-[AE-50 No.].csv
Example: OC_RefrigerantCharge_2017_03_10_AE01-2.csv
* Date format ([YYYY], [MM], [DD]) will use the format set in the initial settings.
CSV output
File format
Row 1st
2nd
Item
File Type Data output date
3rd Item
435th Data
Format
802
Output date
"Address,Date1,CheckResult1,Date2,CheckResult2,Date3,CheckResult3, Date4,CheckResult4,Date5,CheckResult5,Date6,CheckResult6,Date7, CheckResult7,Date8,CheckResult8,Date9,CheckResult9,Date10, CheckResult10"
Outdoor unit address, Check date and time 1, Check result 1, Check date and time 2, Check result 2, Check date and time 3, Check result 3, Check date and time 4, Check result 4, Check date and time 5, Check result 5, Check date and time 6, Check result 6, Check date and time 7, Check result 7, Check date and time 8, Check result 8, Check date and time 9, Check result 9, Check date and time 10, Check result 10 * Only the addresses of the connected units will appear.
File sample
802 2016/10/14 Address,Date1,CheckResult1,Date2,CheckResult2,Date3,CheckResult3,Date4,CheckResult4,Date5,CheckResult5,Date6, CheckResult6,Date7,CheckResult7,Date8,CheckResult8,Date9,CheckResult9,Date10,CheckResult10 51,2015/11/29 21:45,Normal,2015/08/25 23:01,Normal,2015/05/30 22:15,Normal,2015/02/27 21:05,Normal,2015/02/26 22:04,Normal,2014/11/25 21:20,Normal,2014/08/27 22:36,Normal,2014/05/26 22:11,Normal,2014/02/19 21:05,Normal,, 55,2016/02/19 22:45,Low,2015/11/29 21:46,Normal,2015/8/25 23:02,Normal,2015/05/30 22:16,Normal,2015/02/26 22:41,Normal,,,,,,,,,, 61,2016/10/14 11:51,Unmeasurable,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
WT07996X12
122
For building managers Chapter 2
2-8-4. CSV Output
Operation data, such as apportioning parameters, metering device data, and energy management data, can be output in a CSV format from the CSV Output screen.
Important File names, as well as date formats, delimiter characters, decimal separators, temperature units (°C, °F), MCP (PI controller)
measurement units, and MCT (AI controller) measurement units (temperature, humidity) within the files output as CSV will use formats set as initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods. Operation data can be output for each centralized controller. Outputting operation data for all centralized controllers at once is not possible. Output from tablet is not possible.
Note: Use Microsoft® Excel® 2010 or later to read a CSV file.
(1) Click [CSV Output] to download a tool "CSV File Download Tool" for carrying out CSV output from AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
Note: Depending on the browser, a warning message may appear when downloading the tool for the first time. The following is a download method when Google Chrome is used. 1. Click [CSV Output] to display the screen below. Click [Advanced]. 2. Click [Proceed to "IP address of the centralized controller" (unsafe)].
Advanced
Proceed to "IP address of the centralized controller" (unsafe)
3. A warning message will appear in the taskbar of the browser. Click [Keep] to download the tool.
(2) Execute the saved "AEcsvdl.jar" to start up the CSV File Download Tool.
Note: If the "AEcsvdl.jar" file is associated with other applications, the CSV File Download Tool will not start up. Remove the association.
Note: If [Keep] is clicked, the "AEcsvdl.jar" file will be saved in the specified folder. In this case, double clicking the file will also start the CSV File Download Tool.
Note: The charge parameters and metering device data can be output only when the "Charge" license is registered. Note: To start up the CSV File Download Tool, JAVA is required to be installed on the PC.
CSV File Download Tool
Connection destination (IP address or Host name)
Save destination
Charge Parameters
Energy management data
Delete history Browse... Metering device data
Close
WT07996X12
123
(3) Specify the connection destination and the save destination, and click [Charge Parameters], [Metering device data], or [Energy management data]. A login screen will appear. Enter the user name and the password, and click [Login].
Note: Maintenance users set on the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 can login. For maintenance users, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Refer to section 2-5 "Settings" [1] "Maintenance user" for the default maintenance user name and the password.
User name
Password
(4) The selected data will be output in a CSV format to the specified save destination. Percentages of process completion will appear.
Note: Once you have successfully logged in, there is no need to login again every time you download data as long as the CSV File Download Tool remains open.
Note: It may take a few minutes to complete the download, depending on the data volume.
Item
Connection destination
Delete history Save destination Browse...
Description
Enter the IP address or host name of the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 as a destination. The last input value will appear every time the CSV File Download Tool is started up. The last 20 input values will appear in the pulldown menu.
Note: If there is no history, "192.168.1.1" will appear. Deletes all history in the pulldown menu. Specify the destination to save the CSV file.
Note: The default destination will be "My Documents" folder in the login user folder. Click to display a dialog to select a folder where the CSV file will be saved.
WT07996X12
124
For building managers Chapter 2
Item Charge Parameters
Description Click to download a CSV file of the charge parameters.
File name "ChargeParameter"_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]"A"[Indoor unit address]-[Time period (15)].csv
Note: Time periods 1 through 5 can only be set from TG-2000A or Initial Setting Tool. When shipped from the factory, only Time period 1 is settable.
File output destination [Save destination]\[Serial No.]\"OperationalData"\"ChargeParameters"\[Date]
File format
Row
Item
Format
1st
File Type
2nd
Data range
3rd
Indoor unit address
201 Start date + "" + End date
"Address" + M-NET address
4th
Item
"Date,SaveValue,ThermoTime,FanTime,SubHeaterTime"
5th 66th
Data *1*2*3
Date, Capacity-save value (min), Thermo-ON time (min), Fan operation time (min), Sub-heater-ON time (min) *4
*1 Each value is the cumulative value between the start date and the end date. *2 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *3 Each file contains the data of up to 62 days. *4 Even if the indoor unit is not equipped with a sub heater, "Sub-heater-ON time" is counted when the
sub-heater-ON conditions are met, not when the sub heater actually turns on.
File sample
201 12/19/2014-1/10/2015 Address 31 Date,SaveValue,ThermoTime,FanTime,SubHeaterTime 12/19/2014,1258,0,465,0 12/20/2014,1260,0,468,0 12/21/2014,1262,0,472,0 12/22/2014,1264,0,477,0 12/23/2014,1266,0,490,0
: 01/10/2015,2058,0,1013,0
WT07996X12
125
Item
Description Click to download a CSV file of the metering device data.
File name <When a PI controller (PAC-YG60MCA) is used>
"ChargeParameter"_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]"MCPA"[PI controller address][Time period (15)].csv
<When a built-in Pulse Input (PI) is used> "ChargeParameter"_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]"MCP"-[Time period (15)].csv
Note: Time periods 1 through 5 can only be set from TG-2000A or Initial Setting Tool. When shipped from the factory, only Time period 1 is settable.
File output destination [Save destination]\[Serial No.]\"OperationalData"\"ChargeParameters"\[Date]
Metering device data
File format
Row
Item
Format
1st
File Type
2nd
Data range
3rd
MCP
202 Start date + "" + End date <When a PI controller (PAC-YG60MCA) is used>
"MCP" + M-NET address + "" + Time period (15)
<When a built-in Pulse Input (PI) is used> "MCP" + "" + Time period (15)
4th
Item
"No.,Date,Count value(Ch1),Count value(Ch2),Count value(Ch3),Count value(Ch4)"
5th 66th
Data *1*2*3*4
<When a PI controller (PAC-YG60MCA) is used> MCP address + Time period, Date, MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
<When a built-in Pulse Input (PI) is used> Time period, Date, MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
*1 Each value is the cumulative value between the start date and the end date. *2 Each value is between 0.00 and 999999.99. If the value exceeds the maximum value, it will wrap
around to zero. *3 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *4 Each file contains the data of up to 62 days.
File sample
202 12/19/2013-1/10/2014 MCP 50-1 No.,Date,Count value(Ch1),Count value(Ch2),Count value(Ch3),Count value(Ch4) 501,12/19/2013,190887.43,872411.43,227424.88,55515.50 501,12/20/2013,190899.16,872420.12,227428.63,55526.70 501,12/21/2013,190905.22,872442.23,227435.74,55537.90 501,12/22/2013,190910.38,878449.77,227448.19,55549.84
: 501,01/10/2014,200014.38,87950.36,227925.19,60111.63
WT07996X12
126
For building managers Chapter 2
Item
Description
Click to download a CSV file of the energy management data. The "Select energy management data source" window will pop up. Select a data type and specify the dataacquisition period to acquire the data. Refer to section 2-8-4 "CSV Output" [1] "Energy Management Data List" for details about the data that can be output in a CSV format.
Data type
Data-acquisition period
Acquire data
Energy management data
Data type Data-acquisition period Acquire data
Select [5-minute intervals], [30-minute intervals], [1-month intervals], [1day intervals], or [1-year intervals].
Specify the date period to acquire the data.
Note: The date range that can be specified will vary, depending on the item selected in the [Data type] field.
Note: If [1-month intervals] or [1-year intervals] is selected in the [Data type] field, the data-acquisition period cannot be specified.
Note: Only the data for the period during which the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was powered on will be output. The data for the period during which the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was powered off will not be output.
Click to output the CSV file based on the selected criteria.
File name
Data type: 5-minute intervals "EnergyManagement"_"5MIN"_[YYYY]-[MM]-[DD]_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd].csv
Data type: 30-minute intervals "EnergyManagement"_"30MIN"_[YYYY]-[MM]-[DD]_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd].csv
Data type: 1-day intervals "EnergyManagement"_"1DAY"_[YYYY]-[MM]-[DD]_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd].csv
Data type: 1-month intervals "EnergyManagement"_"1MONTH"_[YYYY]-[MM]_[yyyy]-[mm].csv
Data type: 1-year intervals "EnergyManagement"_"1YEAR"_[YYYY]-[yyyy].csv
File-name contents [YYYY] [MM] [DD] [yyyy] [mm] [dd]
Format Start year Start month Start date End year End month End date
WT07996X12
127
Item
Description File output destination
[Save destination]\[Serial No.]\"OperationalData"\"EnergyManagement2"\[Date]
Note: If the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 software version is before Ver. 7.2, the file output destination is [Save destination]\[Serial No.]\"OperationalData"\"EnergyManagement"\ [Date].
Energy management data
File format [Data type: 5-minute intervals]
Row 1st 2nd
Item File Type Data range
3rd
Item *1*2
Format
501
Start date + "" + End date
"DateTime,Data1(51),...Data1(100),Data2(51),...Data2(100), Data3(51),...Data3(100),OutdoorTemp(51),...OutdoorTemp(100), CoolSetTemp(1),...CoolSetTemp(50),HeatSetTemp(1),...HeatSetTemp(50), RoomTemp(1),...RoomTemp(50),MCP1(0),...MCP1(50), MCP2(0),...MCP2(50),MCP3(0),...MCP3(50),MCP4(0),...MCP4(50), MCT1(1),...MCT1(50),MCT2(1),...MCT2(50), AHC1(201),...AHC1(250),AHC2(201),...AHC2(250), MCP1,MCP2,MCP3,MCP4*3"
Item
Data1, Data2, Data3
OutdoorTemp, CoolSetTemp, HeatSetTemp,
4th
Measurement unit *6
RoomTemp
MCP (PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI))
MCT (AI controller) AHC (Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER)
Unit -
ºC, ºF
kWh, m3, MJ, Blank ºC, ºF, % ºC, ºF
5th 17860th
Data *1*2*4*5
Date and time, Data 1 (51), ... (100), Data 2 (51), ... (100), Data 3 (51), ... (100), Outdoor temperature (51), ... (100),Cooling set temperature (1), ... (50), Heating set temperature (1) , ... (50),Room temperature (1), ... (50), MCP 1 (1), ... (50), MCP 2 (1), ... (50), MCP 3 (1), ... (50), MCP 4 (1), ... (50), MCT 1 (1), ... (50), MCT 2 (1), ... (50),AHC temperature 1 (201), ... (250), AHC temperature 2 (201), ... (250), MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
*1 The numbers shown after "MCP" and "MCT" indicate channel No. *2 The numbers in the parentheses indicate M-NET addresses. *3 The measurement value of the built-in Pulse Input (PI) to AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 is only MCP1
MCP4, and the addresses are not displayed. *4 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *5 Each file contains the data for up to the last 62 days including the current day. *6 The measurement units are displayed only when an air conditioning unit or measurement device is
connected.
WT07996X12
128
For building managers Chapter 2
Item
Energy management data
[Data type: 30-minute intervals]
Description
Row 1st 2nd
Item File Type Data range
3rd
Item *1*2
Format
502
Start date + "" + End date
"DateTime,Data1(51),...Data1(100),Data2(51),...Data2(100), Data3(51),...Data3(100),OutdoorTemp(51),...OutdoorTemp(100), CoolSetTemp(1),...CoolSetTemp(50),HeatSetTemp(1),...HeatSetTemp(50), RoomTemp(1),...RoomTemp(50),FanTime(1),...FanTime(50), CoolTime(1),...CoolTime(50),HeatTime(1),...HeatTime(50), ThermoTime(1),...ThermoTime(50),CoolThermoTime(1),...CoolThermoTime(50), HeatThermoTime(1),...HeatThermoTime(50), ThermoCount(1),...ThermoCount(50), SaveValue(1),...SaveValue(50),CoolSaveValue(1),...CoolSaveValue(50), HeatSaveValue(1),...HeatSaveValue(50), ApporionedElectricEnergy(1),...ApporionedElectricEnergy(50), MCP1(0),...MCP1(50),MCP2(0),...MCP2(50),MCP3(0),...MCP3(50), MCP4(0),...MCP4(50),MCT1(1),...MCT1(50),MCT2(1),...MCT2(50), AHC1(201),...AHC1(250),AHC2(201),...AHC2(250), MCP1,MCP2,MCP3,MCP4*3"
Item
Unit
ApportionedElectricEnergy
kWh
ThermoCount, Data1, Data2, Data3
-
OutdoorTemp, CoolSetTemp, HeatSetTemp, RoomTemp
ºC, ºF
4th
Measurement unit *6
FanTime, CoolTime, HeatTime, ThermoTime, CoolThermoTime, HeatThermoTime, SaveValue,
Minute
CoolSaveValue, HeatSaveValue
MCP (PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI))
kWh, m3, MJ, Blank
MCT (AI controller)
ºC, ºF, %
AHC (Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER)
ºC, ºF
5th
Data
37204th *1*2*4*5
Date and time, Data 1 (51), ... (100), Data 2 (51), ... (100), Data 3 (51), ... (100), Outdoor temperature (51), ... (100), Cooling set temperature (1), ... (50), Heating set temperature (1), ... (50), Room temperature (1), ... (50), Fan operation time (1), ... (50), Cooling operation time (1),... (50), Heating operation time (1), ... (50), Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Cooling Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Heating Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Number of Thermo-ON/OFF (1), ... (50), Capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Cooling capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Heating capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Apporioned electric energy (1), ... (50), MCP 1 (1), ... (50), MCP 2 (1), ... (50), MCP 3 (1), ... (50), MCP 4 (1), ... (50), MCT 1 (1), ... (50), MCT 2 (1), ... (50), AHC temperature 1 (201), ... (250), AHC temperature 2 (201), ... (250), MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
*1 The numbers shown after "MCP" and "MCT" indicate channel No. *2 The numbers in the parentheses indicate M-NET addresses. *3 The measurement value of the built-in Pulse Input (PI) to AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 is only MCP1
MCP4, and the addresses are not displayed. *4 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *5 Each file contains the data for up to the last 25 months including the current month. *6 The measurement units are displayed only when an air conditioning unit or measurement device is
connected.
WT07996X12
129
Item
Energy management data
[Data type: 1-day intervals]
Description
Row 1st 2nd
Item File Type Data range
3rd
Item *1*2
Format
503
Start date + "" + End date
"Date,Data1(51),...Data1(100),Data3(51),...Data3(100), OutdoorTemp(51),...OutdoorTemp(100),CoolSetTemp(1),...CoolSetTemp(50), HeatSetTemp(1),...HeatSetTemp(50),RoomTemp(1),...RoomTemp(50), FanTime(1),...FanTime(50),CoolTime(1),...CoolTime(50), HeatTime(1),...HeatTime(50),ThermoTime(1),...ThermoTime(50), CoolThermoTime(1),...CoolThermoTime(50), HeatThermoTime(1),...HeatThermoTime(50), SaveValue(1),...SaveValue(50),CoolSaveValue(1),...CoolSaveValue(50), HeatSaveValue(1),...HeatSaveValue(50), ApporionedElectricEnergy(1),...ApporionedElectricEnergy(50), TargetElectricEnergy(1),...TargetElectricEnergy(50), MCP1(0),...MCP1(50),MCP2(0),...MCP2(50),MCP3(0),...MCP3(50), MCP4(0),...MCP4(50),MCT1(1),...MCT1(50),MCT2(1),...MCT2(50), AHC1(201),...AHC1(250),AHC2(201),...AHC2(250), MCP1,MCP2,MCP3,MCP4*3"
Item
Unit
ApportionedElectricEnergy, TargetElectricEnergy
kWh
Data1, Data3
-
OutdoorTemp, CoolSetTemp, HeatSetTemp, RoomTemp
ºC, ºF
4th
Measurement unit *6
FanTime, CoolTime, HeatTime, ThermoTime, CoolThermoTime, HeatThermoTime, SaveValue,
Minute
CoolSaveValue, HeatSaveValue
MCP (PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI))
kWh, m3, MJ, Blank
MCT (AI controller)
ºC, ºF, %
AHC (Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER)
ºC, ºF
5th 779th
Data
*1*2*4*5
Date, Data 1 (51), ... (100), Data 3 (51), ... (100), Outdoor temperature (51), ... (100), Cooling set temperature (1), ... (50), Heating set temperature (1), ... (50), Room temperature (1), ... (50), Fan operation time (1), ... (50), Cooling operation time (1), ... (50), Heating operation time (1), ... (50), Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Cooling Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Heating Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Cooling capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Heating capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Apporioned electric energy (1), ... (50), Target electric energy (1), ... (50), MCP 1 (1), ... (50), MCP 2 (1), ... (50), MCP 3 (1), ... (50), MCP 4 (1), ... (50), MCT 1 (1), ... (50), MCT 2 (1), ... (50), AHC temperature 1 (201), ... (250), AHC temperature 2 (201), ... (250), MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
*1 The numbers shown after "MCP" and "MCT" indicate channel No. *2 The numbers in the parentheses indicate M-NET addresses. *3 The measurement value of the built-in Pulse Input (PI) to AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 is only MCP1
MCP4, and the addresses are not displayed. *4 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *5 Each file contains the data for up to the last 25 months including the current month. *6 The measurement units are displayed only when an air conditioning unit or measurement device is
connected.
WT07996X12
130
For building managers Chapter 2
Item
Energy management data
[Data type: 1-month intervals]
Description
Row 1st 2nd
Item File Type Data range
3rd
Item *1*2
Format
504
Start year and month + "" + End year and month
"Month,Data1(51),...Data1(100),Data3(51),...Data3(100), OutdoorTemp(51),...OutdoorTemp(100),CoolSetTemp(1),...CoolSetTemp(50), HeatSetTemp(1),...HeatSetTemp(50),RoomTemp(1),...RoomTemp(50), FanTime(1),...FanTime(50),CoolTime(1),...CoolTime(50), HeatTime(1),...HeatTime(50),ThermoTime(1),...ThermoTime(50), CoolThermoTime(1),...CoolThermoTime(50), HeatThermoTime(1),...HeatThermoTime(50), SaveValue(1),...SaveValue(50),CoolSaveValue(1),...CoolSaveValue(50), HeatSaveValue(1),...HeatSaveValue(50), ApporionedElectricEnergy(1),...ApporionedElectricEnergy(50). TargetElectricEnergy(1),...TargetElectricEnergy(50), MCP1(0),...MCP1(50),MCP2(0),...MCP2(50),MCP3(0),...MCP3(50), MCP4(0),...MCP4(50),MCT1(1),...MCT1(50),MCT2(1),...MCT2(50), AHC1(201),...AHC1(250),AHC2(201),...AHC2(250), MCP1,MCP2,MCP3,MCP4*3"
Item
Unit
ApportionedElectricEnergy, TargetElectricEnergy
kWh
Data1, Data3
-
OutdoorTemp, CoolSetTemp, HeatSetTemp, RoomTemp
ºC, ºF
4th
Measurement unit *6
FanTime, CoolTime, HeatTime, ThermoTime, CoolThermoTime, HeatThermoTime, SaveValue,
Minute
CoolSaveValue, HeatSaveValue
MCP (PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI))
kWh, m3, MJ, Blank
MCT (AI controller)
ºC, ºF, %
AHC (Advanced HVAC CONTROLLER)
ºC, ºF
5th29th
Data
*1*2*4*5
yyyy/mm, Data 1 (51), ... (100), Data 3 (51), ... (100), Outdoor temperature (51), ... (100), Cooling set temperature (1), ... (50), Heating set temperature (1), ... (50), Room temperature (1), ... (50), Fan operation time (1), ... (50), Cooling operation time (1), ... (50), Heating operation time (1), ... (50), Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Cooling Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Heating Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Cooling capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Heating capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Apporioned electric energy (1), ... (50), Target electric energy (1), ... (50), MCP 1 (1), ... (50), MCP 2 (1), ... (50), MCP 3 (1), ... (50), MCP 4 (1), ... (50), MCT 1 (1), ... (50), MCT 2 (1), ... (50), AHC temperature 1 (201), ... (250), AHC temperature 2 (201), ... (250), MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
*1 The numbers shown after "MCP" and "MCT" indicate channel No. *2 The numbers in the parentheses indicate M-NET addresses. *3 The measurement value of the built-in Pulse Input (PI) to AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 is only MCP1
MCP4, and the addresses are not displayed. *4 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *5 Each file contains the data for up to the last 25 months including the current month. *6 The measurement units are displayed only when an air conditioning unit or measurement device is
connected.
WT07996X12
131
Item
Energy management data
Close
[Data type: 1-year intervals]
Description
Row 1st 2nd
Item File Type Data range
3rd
Item *1*2
Format
505
Start year + "" + End year
"Year,Data1(51),...Data1(100),Data3(51),...Data3(100), FanTime(1),...FanTime(50),CoolTime(1),...CoolTime(50), HeatTime(1),...HeatTime(50),ThermoTime(1),...ThermoTime(50), CoolThermoTime(1),...CoolThermoTime(50), HeatThermoTime(1),...HeatThermoTime(50),SaveValue(1),...SaveValue(50), CoolSaveValue(1),...CoolSaveValue(50), HeatSaveValue(1),...HeatSaveValue(50), ApporionedElectricEnergy(1),...ApporionedElectricEnergy(50) TargetElectricEnergy(1),...TargetElectricEnergy(50), MCP1(0),...MCP1(50),MCP2(0),...MCP2(50),MCP3(0),...MCP3(50), MCP4(0),...MCP4(50), MCP1,MCP2,MCP3,MCP4*3"
Item
Unit
ApportionedElectricEnergy, TargetElectricEnergy
kWh
Data1, Data3
-
4th
Measurement unit *6
FanTime, CoolTime, HeatTime, ThermoTime, CoolThermoTime, HeatThermoTime, SaveValue,
Minute
CoolSaveValue, HeatSaveValue
MCP (PI controller/Built-in Pulse Input (PI))
kWh, m3, MJ, Blank
5th9th Data *1*2*4*5
yyyy, Data 1 (51), ... (100), Data 3 (51), ... (100), Fan operation time (1), ... (50), Cooling operation time (1), ... (50), Heating operation time (1), ... (50), Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Cooling Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Heating Thermo-ON time (1), ... (50), Capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Cooling capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Heating capacity-save value (1), ... (50), Apporioned electric energy (1), ... (50), Target electric energy (1), ... (50), MCP 1 (1), ... (50), MCP 2 (1), ... (50), MCP 3 (1), ... (50), MCP 4 (1), ... (50), MCP 1, MCP 2, MCP 3, MCP 4
*1 The numbers shown after "MCP" and "MCT" indicate channel No. *2 The numbers in the parentheses indicate M-NET addresses. *3 The measurement value of the built-in Pulse Input (PI) to AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 is only MCP1
MCP4, and the addresses are not displayed. *4 The value will not appear if the data does not exist. *5 Each file contains the data for up to the last 5 years including the current year. *6 The measurement units are displayed only when an air conditioning unit or measurement device is
connected.
Click to close the CSV File Download Tool.
WT07996X12
132
For building managers Chapter 2
[1] Energy Management Data List "Table: Data items" below summarizes the energy-control-related items that can be output in a CSV format, their measurement units, and their data ranges for each data type. "Table: Data period" below summarizes how many months/years worth of data each CSV file can contain.
Table: Data items
Unit type Outdoor unit
Item
Data 1 *1 Data 2 *1 Data 3 *1
Outdoor temperature
5-minute V V V
V
Cooling set temperature
V
Heating set temperature
V
Room temperature *12
V
Indoor unit
Fan operation time Cooling operation time Heating operation time Thermo-ON time Cooling Thermo-ON time Heating Thermo-ON time Number of Thermo-ON/OFF *5 Capacity-save value Cooling capacity-save value Heating capacity-save value Apportioned electric energy Target electric energy
MCP 1
V *9
MCP (PI
MCP 2
V *9
controller/
Built-in Pulse
Input (PI))
MCP 3
V *9
MCP 4
V *9
MCT 1
V
MCT
(AI controller)
MCT 2
V
AHC temperature 1
V
AHC
AHC temperature 2
V
Data type (intervals) 30-minute 1-day *6 1-month *7
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *9
V *10
V *10
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *2
V *3
V *4
V *2
V *3
V *4
1-year *8 V
V
V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10
V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10 V *10
Measurement unit
Data range *11
ºC ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF Minute Minute Minute Minute Minute Minute
0999999.99 09999.99 099.99 -100.0100.0 -148.0212.0 -100.0100.0 32.0199.0 -100.0100.0 32.0199.0 -100.0100.0 32.0199.0 02147483647 02147483647 02147483647 02147483647 02147483647 02147483647
02147483647
Minute Minute Minute kWh kWh kWh, m3, MJ, Blank kWh, m3, MJ, Blank kWh, m3, MJ, Blank kWh, m3, MJ, Blank ºC, % ºF ºC, % ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF
021474836.47 021474836.47 021474836.47 0999999.9999 0214748.3647
0999999.99
0999999.99
0999999.99
0999999.99
-100.0100.0 -148.0212.0 -100.0100.0 -148.0212.0 -100.0100.0 -148.0212.0 -100.0100.0 -148.0212.0
*1 The values are only for factory use. Do not use the values as reference. *2 The values are the temperature or humidity values obtained every hour and half hour. *3 The values are the average daily values of the temperature or humidity values obtained every hour. *4 The values are the average monthly values of the average temperature or humidity values obtained every day. *5 "Number of Thermo-ON/OFF" is the number of times the unit has gone from Thermo-OFF to Thermo-ON. *6 If the data contains the data for the current day, the data will be output that were collected up to the point of time when the CSV file was downloaded. *7 The data for the current month will contain the data that were collected up to the point of time when the CSV file was downloaded. *8 The data for the current year will contain the data that were collected up to the point of time when the CSV file was downloaded. *9 Each value is a cumulative value after the start of operation. If the value exceeds the maximum value, it will wrap around to zero. *10 Each value is a total value for each time period (1-day, 1-month, or 1-year). *11 The number of digits that will be shown after the decimal point varies with the data item. For example, if the data range is "099.99," two digits after the
decimal point will be shown. *12 The outlet air temperature will be output for the outlet air temperature control units.
WT07996X12
133
Table: Data period
Data type (intervals) 5-minute 30-minute 1-day 1-month 1-year
Data period Last 62 days including the current day Last 25 months including the current month Last 25 months including the current month Last 25 months including the current month Last 5 years including the current year
2-8-5. Back up/import settings data
Settings made with the Integrated Centralized Control Web or the Initial Setting Tool, and the data learned by the AISmart Start function can be backed up on a PC. The exported data can be imported back to the AE-200/EW-50 to restore the previous settings after AE-200/EW-50 replacement. The settings data can be backed up or imported from the Integrated Centralized Control Web or Web Browser for Initial Settings.
Click [Maintenance] > [Utility] > [Back up/import settings data] to access the Back up/import settings data screen.
Note: This function is accessible only if logged in as a building manager. Tenant managers and general users cannot use this function.
Back up settings data Click to back up the EW-50 settings data.
Browse... Click to browse for a file that contains the data to
be imported.
Data import source The path to the file to be
imported will appear.
Import settings data Click to import the file specified in the "Data import source" field to the EW-50.
WT07996X12
134
For building managers Chapter 2
[1] Backing up settings data (1) To back up the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 settings data, click [Back up settings data]. The settings data will be
created and the Window's standard file download dialog will appear. Note: It will take a few minutes to create the settings data. Note: The name of the settings data will be "SettingData.dat".
[2] Importing settings data (1) Click the [Browse...] button on the Back up/import settings data screen. (2) Select the file to be imported, and click [Open]. (3) Click [Import settings data] to import the settings data to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
Note: It will take a few minutes to import the settings data.
(4) When the settings data has been successfully imported, the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 will restart.
WT07996X12
135
2-8-6. Initialize Learning Data for AI-Smart Start
This function initializes the learning data for AI-Smart Start. Use this function when the temperature does not reach the specified value at the scheduled time in any group, when the group configuration is changed, or when AE-200 is relocated. Click [Maintenance] in the menu, and then click [Initialize Learning Data for AI Start] to access the Initialize Learning Data for AI Start screen.
Note: This function is available only when logged in with building manager privileges.
Controller Click to narrow down the air
conditioning unit groups to display.
Select all Click to select all displayed air conditioning unit groups at once.
(1) Back up the settings data by referring to [1] "Backing up settings data" in 2-8-5 "Back up/import settings data". (Recommended)
(2) Select the group(s) of learning data to be initialized, and click [Reset].
Note: To restore the learning data, import the backed up learning data.
WT07996X12
136
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Chapter 3. For tenant managers
If logged in with tenant manager privileges, Integrated Centralized Control Web monitoring and operating functions, energy management and schedule functions can be used. Log in with tenant manager privileges to display the Monitor/Operation screen.
Login URL: http://[IP address of the login destination centralized controller AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html
Note: For how to log in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web using a PC or tablet, refer to 3 "Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web" in Chapter 1.
Note: Login processing may require approximately 20 seconds. Also, switching between pages sometimes takes approximately 3 seconds. More time may be required, depending on your communications environment, terminal functionality, and the number of devices in the managed air conditioning unit group.
Note: Consult with the building manager for the ID and password required for login. Note: "Tenant/Personal Web" license is required to use tenant managers.
[1] Menu
[2] Operation status of each unit group
[3] Current date and time
[1] Menu
Monitor/Operation
Displays a screen to monitor and operate the operation conditions of each unit group.
Energy Management Displays the energy use status of each unit group.
Schedule
Sets the schedule operations for each unit group.
WT07996X12
137
[2] Operation status of each unit group A list of unit groups set for login tenant manager management appears.
Note: Up to 200 tenant managers can be registered in the air conditioning control system of Integrated Centralized Control Web. Note: Tenant manager settings can be configured on the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Refer to section 2-5-2 "User
registration" in Chapter 2 for settings methods. Note: Only the unit groups set for tenant manager management can be monitored and operated.
Example) Range of management for when tenant managers set for Company A, Company B, and Company C respectively
Air conditioning control system
Integrated Centralized Control Web
Building owner (Building manager)
Company A (Tenant manager)
Administration Dept.
Sales Dept.
Company B (Tenant manager) Company C (Tenant manager)
Accounting Dept.
Development Dept.
[3] Current date and time This displays the time of the PC on which Integrated Centralized Control Web is used.
Note: Scheduled tasks are executed as per the time on the centralized controller.
Note: Schedule setting and date selection/display for energy management are as per the time on the PC.
Note: Ensure that the time on the Integrated Centralized Control Web and on the managed centralized controller match when using the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Refer to 2-5-3 [1] "Date and Time Settings" in Chapter 2 for details on ensuring these match.
WT07996X12
138
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1. Usage
This section explains how to monitor and operate the air conditioning units, LOSSNAY units, Air To Water (PWFY) units, HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) units, chiller units, MEHT-CH&HP units, and general equipment that are connected to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
1-1. Monitor/Operation
1-1-1. Screen sequence
Group list
Group list (simple operation)
HWHP/chiller/MEHT-CH&HP list
Advanced settings
HWHP/chiller/MEHT-CH&HP list (simple operation)
Advanced settings
WT07996X12
139
1-1-2. Group icons
Each group icon indicates the operation condition of the group. Click the icon, and then click [Advanced] to bring up the operation settings screen.
[1] Air conditioning unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Filter sign ON *1 *15
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON *2
Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF *3
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
Energy-saving ON
*4 *10
Setback ON *8
Unit unknown *9
Occupied/Vacant
*5 *6 *15
Bright/Dark
*7 *8 *15
Room temperature display *11 *15 *17
Room humidity display *12 *13 *15
Hold ON *14
(blue)
(gray)
Operation suspended
*16
(yellow)
(gray)
(red)
AI-Smart Start ON*18
(blue)
*1 Whether or not to display the filter sign ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*2 If the LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of Mr. Slim units, "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON" icon will appear, even when the LOSSNAY unit is operated individually. (Applicable M-NET adapter model: PAC-SF48/50/60/70/80/81MA-E)
*3 If a LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in multiple groups, the LOSSNAY unit may be in operation, even when the "Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF" icon is displayed.
*4 The "Energy-saving ON" icon will appear while the energy-save control is performed on the group, or the outdoor unit that is connected to the group.
*5 The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon will appear only when the remote controller in the group has an occupancy sensor. (ME remote
controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA)) The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon will appear only when [ ] (blue),
[ ] (gray), or [
] (blue/gray) is selected in the initial settings.
*6 The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon takes priority over the "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON" and "Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF" icons.
*7 The Brightness/Darkness status icon will not appear only when the remote controller in the group has a brightness sensor. (ME remote
controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA)) The Brightness/Darkness status icon will appear only when [ ]
(yellow), [ ] (gray), or [
] (yellow/gray) is selected in the initial settings.
*8 The "Setback ON" icon takes priority over the Brightness/Darkness status icon.
*9 The "Unit unknown" icon will stay when the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 cannot be recognized after startup. Check for proper connection of the air conditioning units and proper group settings.
*10 The "Energy-saving ON" icon takes priority over the "Room temperature display" and "Room humidity display" icons.
*11 Display option of the room temperature ([Always show], [Show during operation], [Hide]) can be set in the initial settings. Even when [Set temp.], [Room temp.(Always)/Set temp.], or [Room temp.(During op.)/Set temp.] is selected in the initial settings, the room temperature will be displayed.
*12 The "Room humidity display" icon will appear only when the remote controller in the group has a humidity sensor. (ME remote controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA))
*13 Whether or not to display the humidity ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*14 The "Hold ON" icon is displayed for the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not for the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
*15 Initial settings can be configured in the basic settings screen on the Initial Setting Tool, LCD, or the Web browser for initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
*16 The "Operation suspended" icon appears when an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet ®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function).
*17 The outlet air temperature is displayed for the outlet air temperature control units.
*18 The "AI-Smart Start ON" icon will appear 90 minutes before the scheduled start time and stays on the screen until the scheduled start time. If the room temperature has not reached the set temperature at the scheduled start time, the icon will remain on the screen after the scheduled
start time. The icon will disappear when the set temperature has been reached.
WT07996X12
140
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
ON
OFF
Error
Filter sign ON *1 *6
Schedule set *3
Schedule disabled *3 Energy-saving ON *2 Night Purge ON *3
Hold ON *7
Operation suspended
*8
(blue)
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group and HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Energy-saving ON *2
Water temperature display *4
(red)
[4] Chiller unit group
ON
OFF
Hold ON *7
Operation suspended
*8*9
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
[5] MEHT-CH&HP unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
[6] Other equipment group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set *5 *6
Schedule disabled
Hold ON *7
*1 Whether or not to display the filter sign ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*2 The "Energy-saving ON" icon will appear while the energy-save control is performed on the LOSSNAY unit group, group of LOSSNAY with heater/humidifier, or the outdoor unit that is connected to these groups. This icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*3 If Schedule is set during Night Purge operation, then the order of priority for display will be "Night Purge ON" "Schedule set". Even if Schedule is disabled, the order of priority for display will be "Night Purge ON" "Schedule disabled".
*4 The "Water temperature display" icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*5 If any schedule setting is applied to a DIDO controller whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen in the initial settings), the "Schedule set" icon will appear, but the scheduled operations will not be performed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods
*6 Initial settings can be configured in the basic settings screen on the Initial Setting Tool, LCD, or the Web browser for initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
*7 The "Hold ON" icon is displayed for the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not for the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
*8 The "Operation suspended" icon appears when an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet ®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function).
*9 The "Operation suspended" icon will appear only for the Air To Water (PWFY) unit groups.
Note: Icons can be changed in the group settings screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
141
1-1-3. Monitoring the operation status
This section explains how to monitor the operation status of units.
[1] Air conditioning unit, LOSSNAY unit, Air To Water (PWFY) unit, and other equipment groups Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Show groups] to display the operation status of unit groups.
Controller Click to narrow down the groups
to display.
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Group icon
Room temperature
Room humidity
Set temperature
Operation mode
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode". · Air conditioning unit group
Cool
Dry
Fan
Heat
Auto
Auto (Cool)
Auto (Heat)
Setback
· LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Bypass
Heat Recovery
Auto
· Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
Cooling
Note: In [Controller], it is possible to narrow down the unit groups for group display into "Centralized controller units," "Block units," and "Energy management block units."
Note: The selection screen displays the centralized controllers to which unit groups set for tenant manager management (in section 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2) are connected and the blocks and energy management blocks of unit groups set for tenant manager management.
Note: For how to configure centralized controller name setting, block and energy management block settings, and name settings, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings).
Note: The group name can be displayed using up to 10 double-byte, or 10 to 18 single-byte characters. The number of characters that can be displayed differs depending on character type. Name setting is carried out through initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
142
Centralized controller selection
Block selection
Energy management block selection
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Centralized controller name
Block name
* Example of narrowing down the range in [Controller]
Energy management block name
1st floor Centralized controller (Centralized controller units)
Company A (Energy mgmt block units)
Administration Dept. (Block units)
Accounting Dept. (Block units)
2nd floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
Sales Dept. (Block units)
Company A Facility (Energy mgmt block units)
3rd floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
No-name block 4 (Energy mgmt block units)
4th floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
WT07996X12
143
[2] HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [HWHP] to display the operation status of HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
Note: [HWHP] will not appear if no HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) units have been registered to any group. Note: Fan mode will appear only for CAHV units. Brine temperature will appear only for CRHV units.
Controller Click to narrow down the
HWHP unit groups to display.
Group name Group icon
Operation mode
Set temperature
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Temperatures Representative water temperature, outdoor temperature, brine temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
Fan mode
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode". · HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit group
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
[3] Chiller unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Chiller] to display the operation status of chiller unit groups.
Note: [Chiller] will not appear if no chiller units have been registered to any group.
Controller Click to narrow down the chiller unit groups to display.
Group name Group icons
Operation mode
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once. Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Fan mode
Set temperature
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Cooling
Heating
Heating ECO Anti-freeze
Temperatures Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
WT07996X12
144
[4] MEHT-CH&HP unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [MEHT-CH&HP] to display the operation status of MEHTCH&HP unit groups.
Note: [MEHT-CH&HP] will not appear if no MEHT-CH&HP units have been registered to any group.
Controller Click to narrow down the MEHT-CH&HP unit groups
to display.
Group name Group icons
Operation mode Set temperature
Temperatures (Manager3000) Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed. (Temperatures are detected by the representative unit.)
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Cooling
Heating
Temperatures (W3000) Outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
For tenant managers Chapter 3
WT07996X12
145
1-1-4. Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated
In the group list, select the icon(s) of the group(s) to be operated as explained below. [1] Selecting group icons (1) Selecting unit group(s) that are managed by tenant managers
(1) In the group list, click the icon(s) of the group(s) you want to operate. The selected group icon(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Group selection
Deselect all
Close
(2) Selecting all unit groups that are managed by tenant managers (1) In the group list, click [Select all]. The all icon(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Select all Deselect all
Close
WT07996X12
146
For tenant managers Chapter 3
(3) Selecting all groups under the control of a given controller connected to the unit groups that are managed by tenant managers
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the controller selection screen, select a centralized controller. The unit groups that are under the control of the selected centralized controller will appear. In the group list (centralized controller units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Controller
Group list
Controller selection Groups of the selected controller Select all
Deselect all
Close
(4) Selecting all groups in a given block that are managed by tenant managers
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the block selection screen, select a block. The unit groups that belong to the selected block will appear. In the group list (block units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Block selection
Groups of the selected block
Select all
Controller
Deselect all
Close
(5) Selecting all groups in a given energy management block that are managed by tenant managers
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the block selection screen, select an energy management block. The unit groups that belong to the selected energy management block will appear. In the group list (energy management block units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Block selection
Groups of the selected energy management block
Select all
Controller
Deselect all
Close
WT07996X12
147
[2] Selecting equipment type (1) When the equipment types of all selected groups are the same
Selecting the group icons to operate and clicking [Advanced] in the taskbar will bring up the operation settings screen for the selected groups. Refer to section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" for details about the advanced settings.
Selecting groups of the same equipment
type
Taskbar
Advanced settings
Note: [ON] and [OFF] operations can be performed on the taskbar for the selected unit groups.
(2) When the equipment types of the selected groups are different
Selecting the group icons to operate will bring up the equipment type selection options in the taskbar. Select an equipment type, and click [Operations] to display the operation settings screen. Refer to section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" for details about the advanced settings.
Taskbar
Operations Click to operate all groups of the selected equipment type at once.
Note: When two or more equipment types are selected, only the [ON/OFF] and [Schedule] settings can be configured. Note: [Other equipment] in the taskbar indicates general equipment.
WT07996X12
148
For tenant managers Chapter 3
[3] Selecting HWHP (CAHV, CRHV), chiller unit, and MEHT-CH&HP unit groups
(1) Selecting HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit groups
(1) In the HWHP screen, click the group you want to operate. The selected HWHP unit group will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect.
Deselect all Select all
Close
(2) Selecting chiller unit groups (1) In the Chiller screen, click the group(s) you want to operate. The selected chiller unit group(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Deselect all Select all
Close
WT07996X12
149
(3) Selecting MEHT-CH&HP unit groups (1) In the MEHT-CH&HP screen, click the group you want to operate. The selected MEHT-CH&HP unit group will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Close] in the taskbar.
Close
WT07996X12
150
1-1-5. Advanced settings
In the group list, selecting the group icon(s) and clicking [Advanced] in the taskbar will bring up the operation settings screen for the selected group(s). The current operation status will appear. Change necessary operation settings, and then click [Send] to reflect the changes. Click [Close] to return to the previous screen without making any changes.
Note: When the setting is changed from other controllers, the operation status shown on the screen will not be updated while the screen is open.
[1] Air conditioning unit group
Set temperature Group name
ON/OFF
Operation mode
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Air Direction Hold
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Fan Speed
Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Filter Sign Reset Click to reset the filter sign.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Air Direction Fan Speed
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Click the desired operation mode. [Cool], [Dry], [Fan], [Heat], [Auto], [Setback]
Select an operation mode.
Note: When the operation mode signals from the cooling/heating switchover model of units are mixed (Cool and Heat), the operation mode will not change and the selected operation mode will blink.
Note: The Setback mode can be selected on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Depending on settings values resulting from restrictions by device functions and set temperature range restriction functions, temperature settings ranges may be restricted.
Note: For the same indoor unit, when changing operation mode and set temperature from multiple operation devices (system controllers, remote controllers), display of outside the allowable settings range may occur.
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
Note: Depending on the unit model, setting in 0.5°C units and 1°C units is possible.
Note: If the indoor unit supports the dual-set-point function in the Auto mode and when the operation mode above is set to Auto or Setback, two set temperatures for Cool mode and Heat mode can be set.
Note: When the indoor units that support the dual-set-point function and the indoor units that do not support the dual-set-point function exist in the same group, only one set temperature can be set in the Auto mode.
Note: Set the outlet air temperature for the outlet air temperature control units.
Note: The set temperature is not displayed when the operation group contains both free-plan units and outlet air temperature control units.
Adjust the air direction with the
Auto
Swing
buttons.
Adjust the fan speed
Auto
with the
buttons.
WT07996X12
151
Item Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY
Schedule
Hold
Filter Sign Reset
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Select [High] or [Low].
Switches the fan speed of the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set. Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will not be disabled.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the filter sign. (The cumulative time will be reset.) When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter.
Note: After the filter sign is reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on the local remote controllers.
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Send Close
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, Set temperature, Filter Sign Reset, Air Direction, Fan Speed, and Timer.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Note: If "Timer" operation is prohibited, scheduled operations set on the local remote controller will be disabled.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
* After [Send] is clicked, it takes a while for the status of the LOSSNAY unit group icons to be updated. * If a LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in multiple groups, the LOSSNAY unit may be in operation, even when
the LOSSNAY unit is displayed as "stopped".
WT07996X12
152
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Note: When the indoor units support a dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set for the Auto mode. When this function is used, indoor units automatically switch over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures. The graph below shows an example of operation patterns of units operated in the dual-set-point mode.
Set temp. (Cool)
Operation patterns in the dual-set-point mode
Room temperature fluctuates in response to changes in outdoor temperature.
Set temp. (Heat)
Heat
Cool
Heat
Automatically switches over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures.
Room temp.
Cool
If the indoor units of the selected unit group support the dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set.
(1) Temperature setting for a group in which all indoor units support dual-set-point mode
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
(2) Temperature setting for when the groups that support the dual-set-point mode and the groups that do not are selected together
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
WT07996X12
153
Set temperature (singleset-point) for groups that do not support the dualset-point mode
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Group name ON/OFF
Fan Speed Hold
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Ventilation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Humidify
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Filter Sign Reset Click to reset the filter sign.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Ventilation mode
Fan Speed
Humidify Schedule
Hold
Filter Sign Reset
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Turns on or off the units.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: If the units are turned off during the Night Purge operation, the Night Purge
operation will not be performed until the next day.
Select a ventilation mode.
Click the desired ventilation mode. [Bypass], [Heat Recovery], [Auto]
Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Auto
Adjust the fan speed with the
buttons.
Note: During the Night Purge operation, the fan speed can be adjusted but
will
not be displayed.
Select [ON], [OFF], or [Auto].
Switches the operation status of the humidification function. Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the filter sign. (The cumulative time will be reset.) When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter.
Note: After the filter sign is reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on the local remote controllers.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF and Filter Sign Reset.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
154
For tenant managers Chapter 3
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Group name
ON/OFF
Operation mode
Set temperature Hold
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode Set temperature
Schedule
Hold
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Heating], [Heating ECO], [Hot Water], [Anti-freeze], [Cooling]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, and Set temperature.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
155
[4] HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit group
Group name
ON/OFF
Operation mode
Set temperature Hold
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Error Reset
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode Set temperature
Schedule
Hold
Error Reset
Fan Mode
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Heating], [Heating ECO], [Hot Water], [Anti-freeze]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note:When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the error. When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Note: The fan mode for CRHV units cannot be operated.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, and Set temperature.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
156
For tenant managers Chapter 3
[5] Chiller unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Operation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Set temperature
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Fan Mode
Schedule
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Cooling], [Heating], [Heating ECO], [Anti-freeze]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note:When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Click the operation item to switch the setting between "Prohibit" and "Permit".
The following operations or setting change can be prohibited from the local remote controllers and when the Integrated Centralized Control Web is logged in with general user privileges: ON/OFF, Operation mode, and Set temperature.
: Permit
: Prohibit
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
157
[6] MEHT-CH&HP unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Operation mode
Set temperature
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Schedule
Send Click to reflect the changes made. Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Schedule
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Cooling], [Heating]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note:When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
158
For tenant managers Chapter 3
[7] Other equipment group
Group name ON/OFF
Hold
Schedule
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Schedule
Hold
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select [Available] or [Not Available].
Enables/Disables the schedules. Note: When [Not Available] is set, the scheduled operations are disabled even if schedules are set.
Enables/Disables the Hold function. When the Hold function is enabled, the scheduled operations are disabled.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: The operations that have been scheduled on the remote controller will also be disabled.
Note: [Hold type] can be specified in the [Advanced] screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
Note: The Hold function can be used on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
Note: General equipment whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen
in the initial settings) cannot be operated and an operation prohibition mark is displayed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
159
1-1-6. Operation suspension function
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function), the operation control status will be indicated with an icon and a message. While this indicator is displayed, the status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON].
[1] Group list
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear and all the units in the group will stop or remain stopped.
[2] Quick access on the task bar
When a group is selected whose operation is under suspension, its operation status will appear as [OFF], and this status cannot be changed from the task bar.
Operation suspended
[3] Advanced settings screen
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear next to the [ON/OFF] button and next to the [ON/OFF] button under "Prohibit Remote Controller Operation." While this icon is displayed, the operation status cannot be changed. The type of operation suspension function will appear in the top center of the window.
ON/OFF OFF will be highlighted while the group is under operation suspension.
"Operation suspended" icon
"Operation suspended" icon
Type of operation suspension function (Emergency stop or Energy-save)
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation The ON/OFF button will be grayed out and not available for selection.
Item ON/OFF
"Operation suspended" icon
Prohibit Remote Controller Operation
Description
The operation status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON] while the group is under operation suspension.
The icon [ ] appears while the group is under operation suspension.
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building
management system (BACnet®), [
] will appear.
While the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function,
[
] will appear.
When the group is under operation suspension, the ON/OFF button under "Prohibit Remote Controller Operation" will be grayed out and not available for selection.
WT07996X12
160
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1-2. Energy management
The energy-control-related status, such as electric energy consumption, operation time, and outdoor temperature, can be displayed in a graph. Also, preset target value of the electric energy consumption can be checked.
Note: Energy use status data and ranking data can be output in a CSV format. Note: Output to CSV is only possible on a PC. Output from tablet (Android, iOS tablet) is not possible and the [Download] button is
not displayed. Note: File names, as well as date formats, delimiter characters, and temperature units (°C, °F) within the files output as CSV will
use formats set as initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods. Note: For the file name and AE No. within the files output as CSV, refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. Note: Energy management function cannot be used on HWHP, chiller units, and MEHT-CH&HP units.
Important Energy management settings and measurement settings are required beforehand to display a graph. Refer to the Instruction
Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
1-2-1. Energy Use Status
On the Energy Use Status screen, the energy-control-related status, such as electric energy consumption, operation time, and room temperature, can be displayed in a graph. Operators can check the detailed status of given indoor units by specifying the date to display the data per unit address, group, block, or energy management block. Also, the status of other indoor units can be displayed at the same time for comparison. Displaying energy-control-related status of each hour, day, and month in a graph visualizes the energy-saving status. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Energy Use Status] to access the Energy Use Status screen.
(1) Click [Edit] to set the display items.
Display target Comparison target
Graph region
Edit Click to change the display target and comparison target.
Display items for line graph
Detailed information Mousing over the graph area will display the values on the bar and line graphs.
Display items for bar graph
Display range
Display items for line graph
Display range
Display items for line graph
Cancel Click to return to the graph screen without making any
changes.
WT07996X12
161
Download Click to output the data in a CSV format. (This button is not displayed on a tablet.)
Display target
Date to display the data
Display items for bar graph
Comparison target
Same as display target Check the checkbox to set the same date as the date selected in "Date to display the data". Comparison date Display items for bar graph OK Click to confirm the changes and return to the graph screen.
Item Display range
Description
Select [Block], [Group], [Address], or [Energy mgmt block] to display its data. Select a centralized controller, and then select a block, group, address, or energy management block to display its data.
Out of the units that are under the control of the centralized controller selected in [Centralized controller selection], only the blocks and energy management blocks to which the unit groups managed by tenant managers belong are displayed.
Target block selection
Centralized controller selection
Display target selection
Display target
Target group selection
Target address selection
Target energy management block selection
Note: Tenant managers cannot select all blocks at once in the target block selection screen. Note: When the name has not been registered, the display varies with the display range setting as follows.
Display range Block Group
Address *2
Energy management block
Name display "Block" + AE No. *1 + Block number "Group" + AE No. *1 + Group number <Built-in Pulse Input (PI)>
"Metering device" + AE No. *1
<Other than built-in Pulse Input (PI)> "Address" + AE No. *1 + Address number
"Energy mgmt block" + AE No. *1 + Energy management block number
*1 For AE No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. *2 There is no function to register a name per address.
Note: DIDO controllers (PAC-YG66DCA) are not displayed.
WT07996X12
162
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Item
Description Click [Date] to specify a date to display the data. The date can be specified as daily, monthly, or yearly.
Year selection
Month selection
Date selection
Date to display the data
Note: The storage period of the energy use status data is as follows.
Date selection Year Month Date
Data storage period The last 3 years including the current year The last 25 months including the current month The last 25 months including the current month
Comparison target
Comparison date
Select a block name, group name, address number, or energy management block name to display the comparison data. (The comparison target selection screen is the same as the display target selection screen.)
Specify a date to display the comparison data. (The comparison date selection screen is the same as the display target date selection screen.)
Select an item to display its data in the bar graph. Select a display range from [Block], [Group], [Address], or [Energy mgmt block] to display its data. The selectable items vary, depending on the display range. Only the items that can be displayed in the graph appear. Refer to the table below for details.
Indoor unit Display range
Address *5
Display items for bar graph
Display item
*3 *4
*3
*3
*3
Display items for bar graph
Group *5
*1 *2
Block *5
Energy management block
*5
*1 The electric energy (kWh) consumed by indoor units will appear in the graph. The values are apportioned based on the setting for "Indoor unit operation apportioning mode". Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for the "Indoor unit operation apportioning mode" setting.
*2 A small amount of electric energy consumption (kWh) may appear in the graph even when no indoor units have been operated. This is because the standby electric energy is apportioned, which is normal.
*3 The indoor unit's cumulative operation time (minute) for the selected item will appear in the graph. · "FAN operation time" is the cumulative duration of time in which the indoor unit is ON. · "Thermo-ON time (Total/Cool/Heat)" is the cumulative duration of time in which the refrigerant is flowing into the indoor unit. (Cool: when the Cool mode is selected; Heat: when the Heat mode is selected; Total: when either mode is selected)
*4 Only "FAN operation time" is displayed for LOSSNAY units. *5 "Energy Management License Pack" is required. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only)
WT07996X12
163
Item
Description
Select an item to display its data in the line graph. Note: When the display range is [Block] or [Energy mgmt block], display items for line graph are not displayed. Note: If "Energy Management License Pack" is not registered, line graph cannot be selected. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only)
Display items for line graph
Display items for line graph
Indoor unit Display range
Address
Display item
*1
*1
*1
Group
*1 When [Day] is selected as a date, the temperature values obtained every hour and half hour will appear. When [Month] is selected, the average daily temperature values will appear. When [Year] is selected, the average monthly temperature values will appear.
Note: By quickly switching to items displayed on a graph and dates, it is possible to confirm the energy usage status.
Display target
Date to display the data
Comparison target
Comparison date
(1) To switch the display target Click [Display target] or [Comparison target] to display the target selection screen, and switch to the items to display on a graph. It is not possible to switch to [Display target] and [Comparison target] that have a display range different from before switching.
(2) To switch the date Click [Date to display the data] or [Comparison date] to display the date selection screen, and switch to the dates to display on a graph. Ensure that the [Date to display the data] and the [Comparison date] units are the same.
WT07996X12
164
For tenant managers Chapter 3
(2) Click [OK] to return to the previous screen. The display target data and the comparison target data will appear in a bar graph and a line graph.
Item
Bar graph/line graph Display target
Bar graph
(Blue)
Description
Comparison target
(Light blue)
Target value *1
Graph region
Line graph
(Orange)
(Blue)
*1 The target values will appear in the graph when "Block" or "Energy management block" is selected as a display range and when [Electric Energy] is selected as a display item for bar graph.
Note: The data for a certain period of time may not appear if it does not exist due to the changes of the daylight saving time setting or current time setting. If the data overlap for a certain period of time due to the time overlap that was occurred when daylight saving ended or the current time setting was changed, the newer data will appear in the graph.
Note: When the date is specified as daily, the graph is shown in 30-minute increments.
Note: When the target value is set, areas exceeding the target value will be displayed in pink.
When exceeding target value
Remaining to target value
Portion exceeding target value Consumed amount
Portion remaining to target value
Target value
Consumed amount
Target value
Detailed information
Mouse over the graph area to display the values on the bar graph and line graph for the dates moused over on the graph area.
Line graph value (display target, orange)
Bar graph value (display target, blue)
Target value
Line graph value (comparison target, blue)
Bar graph value (comparison target, light blue)
WT07996X12
165
(3) To output the displayed measurement data in a CSV format, click [Download]. The file name and file format will vary as shown below, depending on the selected date range.
Note: This function cannot be used on a tablet.
Item
Description
<When any item in the "Comparison target" field is selected> Date range: Year EM_AnnualTrend_[yyyy]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type]_[YYYY]_[Comparison target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Month EM_MonthlyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type]_[YYYY]-[MM]_ [Comparison target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Day EM_DailyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type]_[YYYY]-[MM][DD]_[Comparison target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
File name
<When no item in the "Comparison target" field is selected> Date range: Year EM_AnnualTrend_[yyyy]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Month EM_MonthlyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
Date range: Day EM_DailyTrend_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[Display target]_[Bar graph type]_[Line graph type].csv
File-name contents [yyyy] [mm] [dd]
[Display target] *1
[Bar graph type]
[Line graph type]
[YYYY] [MM] [DD]
[Comparison target]
[Bar graph type] [Line graph type]
Format
The year specified in the "Date to display the data" field
The month specified in the "Date to display the data" field
The date specified in the "Date to display the data" field
Address
AE No. + "_" + "A" + M-NET address (001050) + "_" + "00"
Group
AE No. + "_" + "G" + Group No. (001050) + "_" + "00"
Block
AE No. + "_" + "B" + Block No. (001050) + "_" + "00"
Energy
AE No. + "_" + "E" + Energy management block No. (001200) + "_" +
management block "00"
B01: Indoor unit electric energy
B02: Fan operation time
B03: Thermo-ON time (Total)
B04: Thermo-ON time (Cool)
B05: Thermo-ON time (Heat)
B00: No selection
B000: Unregistered blocks
L01: Set temperature (Cool)
L02: Set temperature (Heat)
L03: Room temperature
L00: No selection
The year specified in the "Comparison date" field
The month specified in the "Comparison date" field
The date specified in the "Comparison date" field
Address
Group Block
The same output format as for display target
Energy management block
The type of the item selected for the bar graph display item for comparison target
The type of the item selected for the line graph display item for comparison target
*1 For AE No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1.
WT07996X12
166
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Item File format
Description
Row
Item
1st File Type
2nd Date
Date range Year Month Day Year Month Day
3rd
Display target/ Comparison target *5
Format
413
412
411
yyyy:YYYY
yyyy/mm:YYYY/MM
yyyy/mm/dd:YYYY/MM/DD
Address
"Address" + AE No.*3 + "_" + M-NET address (001050)
Group
Group name*2
Block
Block name*2
Energy management block
Energy management block name*2
Date range: Year
"Month", Display target (Bar), Comparison target (Bar), "Target electric energy[kWh]"*1, Display target (Line), Comparison target (Line)
Date range: Month
"Day", Display target (Bar), Comparison target (Bar), "Target electric energy[kWh]"*1, Display target (Line), Comparison target (Line)
Date range: Day
"Time", Display target (Bar), Comparison target (Bar), "Target electric energy[kWh]"*1, Display target (Line), Comparison target (Line)
4th Measurement item
The bar and line graph items that can be output vary with the display target/ comparison target.
V: Item that can be output; : Item that cannot be output
Display target/Comparison target
Bar graph
Line graph
Address/Indoor unit
V
V
Group
V
V
Block
V
Energy management block
V
5th
*4
Data
Year Month Day
The format of the display target and comparison target to be output is as follows. Address
"Address" + "-" + AE No.*3 + Address number + "-" + Display item (Bar/Line)
Group Group name*2 + "-" + Display item (Bar/Line)
Block Block name*2 + "-" + Display item (Bar)
Energy management block Energy management block name*2 + "-" + Display item (Bar)
mm, d, hh:mm,
Data value (Bar), Comparison data value (Bar), Target electric energy value*1, Data value (Line), Comparison data value (Line)
*1 "Target electric energy(kWh)" and the target electric energy value will appear only when the data is displayed in the graph.
*2 If the group name has not been registered, ["Group" + AE No. + "-" + Group number] will appear. If the block name has not been registered, ["Block" + AE No. + "-" + Block number] will appear. If the energy management block name has not been registered, ["Energy mgmt block" + AE No. + "-" + Energy management block number] will appear.
*3 For AE No., refer to 4 "Name Display" in Chapter 1. *4 The number of rows varies with the selected date range. (Day: 5th52nd; Month: 5th35th; Year: 5th16th) *5 When no item is selected as a display item/comparison item, "Target None" will appear.
WT07996X12
167
Item
Description
Date range: Year
413 2015:2014 Administration Dpt./Block01-1-03 Month,Administration Dpt. - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Block01-1-03 - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh],Administration Dpt. - Outdoor Temp.[ºC],Block01-1-03 - Outdoor Temp.[ºC] 01,675.17,661.93,600,0.4,0.5 02,697.38,683.71,700,0.3,3.2 03,528.63,518.26,400,4.5,3.8 ...
File sample (Display range: Block)
Date range: Month
412 2015/04:2014/04 Administration Dpt./Block01-1-03 Day,Administration Dpt. - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Block01-1-03 - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh],Administration Dpt. - Outdoor Temp.[ºC],Block01-1-03 - Outdoor Temp.[ºC] 1,24.69,8.74,22,26.2,17.9 2,25.31,8.22,22,27,17.4 3,12.36,22.33,10,25.2,16.6 ...
Date range: Day
411 2015/08/19:2014/06/01 Administration Dpt./Block01-1-03 Time,Administration Dpt. - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Block01-1-03 - Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Administration Dpt. - Outdoor Temp.[ºC],Block01-1-03 - Outdoor Temp.[ºC] 00:00,0.61,0.25,23.2,17.8 00:30,0.65,0.51,23.1,17.6 01:00,0.66,0.48,22.1,18.1 ...
WT07996X12
168
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1-2-2. Ranking
On the Ranking screen, the rankings in electric energy consumption, fan operation time, and Thermo-ON time (Total/Cool/Heat) of given indoor units (managed by the tenant manager that logged in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web) can be displayed per block, group, unit address, and energy management block in descending order in the bar graph. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Ranking] to access the Ranking screen.
Note: "Energy Management License Pack" is required to access the Ranking screen. (AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E only)
(1) Click [Display target] to set the display items.
Display target
Measurement unit/scale
Graph region Display item
Detailed information Mousing over the graph will display the values of the bar and line graphs.
Download Click to output the data in a CSV format. (This button is not displayed on a tablet.)
Display range
Date to display the data
Cancel Click to return to the previous screen without making any changes.
OK Click to confirm the changes and return to the previous screen.
Item Display target Display range
Date
Description
"Display range" and "date" to display a ranking graph are displayed.
Select [Block], [Group], [Address], or [Energy mgmt block] to display its data in a ranking graph.
Specify a date to display the data in a ranking graph. Click to display the screen to select "year", "month", or "day".
Note: When "year" is specified, specify "yyyy" from the last 5 years including the current year. When "month" is specified, specify "yyyy/mm" from the last 25 months including the current month. When "day" is specified, specify "yyyy/mm/dd" from the last 25 months including the current month.
Important: Only the data for the period during which the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was powered on will appear in the graph. The data for the period during which the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was powered off will not appear in the graph.
WT07996X12
169
Item Display item
Description Select an item to display its data in a ranking graph.
Note: The selectable items vary, depending on the item selected in the "Display range" field.
Display range
Display item
Address
Group
Block
Energy management block
Measurement The graph shows the measurement unit that is suitable for the selected display item, and scale that is
unit/scale
automatically adjusted to show the full range of data.
(2) Click [OK] to return to the previous screen. The graph will be created based on the specified criteria.
Item Ranking graph
Description Portion exceeding target value
Target value
Usage ratio for the target value
Graph region
Ranking
Name of the selected display range
Consumed amount
Portion remaining to target value
Note: Target value will appear only when [Energy mgmt block] or [Block] is selected. Note: Target value will not appear when the target value is not set or set to "0".
Detailed information
Mouse over the graph area to display the values on the graph for the area moused over on the graph area.
Graph value Target value
WT07996X12
170
For tenant managers Chapter 3
(3) To output the displayed ranking data in a CSV format, click [Download]. The file name and file format will vary as shown below, depending on the selected date range.
Item
Description
Date range: Year EM_AnnualRanking_[yyyy]_[Display range]_[Ranking graph type].csv
Date range: Month EM_MonthlyRanking_[yyyy]-[mm]_[Display range]_[Ranking graph type].csv
Date range: Day EM_DailyRanking_[yyyy]-[mm]-[dd]_[Display range]_[Ranking graph type].csv
File name File format
File-name contents [yyyy] [mm] [dd]
[Display range]
[Ranking graph type]
Format
The year specified in the [Date] field
The month specified in the [Date] field
The date specified in the [Date] field
Address
"A999"
Group
"G999"
Block
"B999"
Energy management block "E999"
B01: Indoor unit electric energy
B02: Fan operation time
B03: Thermo-ON time (Total)
B04: Thermo-ON time (Cool)
B05: Thermo-ON time (Heat)
Row Item
Date range
Format
Year
1st File Type Month
Day
Year
2nd Date
Month
Day
3rd Display range
4th Measurement item
5th 28th
Data
416 415 414 yyyy yyyy/mm yyyy/mm/dd Address Group Block Energy management block Address Group Block Energy management block Address Group Block Energy management block
"All Addresses" "All Groups" "All Blocks"
"All EM Blocks"
"Address number", Display item "Group name"*1, Display item "Block name"*1, Display item, "Target electric energy[kWh]"*2 "Ene Block name"*1, Display item, "Target electric energy[kWh]"*2 Address number, Data value Group name*1, Data value Block name*1, Data value, Target electric energy value*2 Energy management block name*1, Data value, Target electric energy value*2
*1 If the group name has not been registered, ["Group" + AE No. + "-" + group number] will appear. If the block name has not been registered, ["Block" + AE No. + "-" + block number] will appear. If the energy management block name has not been registered, ["Energy mgmt block" + AE No. + "-" + Energy management block number] will appear.
*2 "Target electric energy(kWh)" and the target electric energy value will appear only when the data is displayed in the graph.
WT07996X12
171
Item
Description
Date range: Year
416 2015 All Blocks Block name,Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh] Administration Dept.,9370.68,7886.4 Block01-1-03,7283.76,6744.36 Unregistered Blocks,6327.72,7339.56 Block01-01,4166.4,6286.8 Block03-01-10,2302.68,1949.28 Accounting Dept.,2224.56,4077.12
File sample (Display range: Block)
Date range: Month
415 2015/06 All Blocks Block name,Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh] Administration Dept.,780.89,657.2 Block01-1-03,606.98,562.03 Unregistered Blocks,527.31,611.63 Block01-01,347.2,523.9 Block03-01-10,191.89,162.44 Accounting Dept.,185.38,339.76
Date range: Day
414 2015/06/01 All Blocks Block name,Indoor Unit Electric Energy[kWh],Target electric energy[kWh] Administration Dept.,25.19,21.2 Block01-1-03,19.58,18.13 Unregistered Blocks,17.01,19.73 Block01-01,11.2,16.9 Block03-01-10,6.19,5.24 Accounting Dept.,5.98,10.96
WT07996X12
172
1-2-3. Target Value
On the Target Value screen, target values that are displayed in the graph on the Energy Use Status screen and the Ranking screen can be checked. Based on the total annual electric energy consumption, target values for each month, each day of the week, and each block are set. Click [Energy Management] in the menu, and then click [Target Value] to access the Target Value screen.
Note: Target value settings can be configured on the AE-200/AE-50's LCD. Note: Block registration is required for the air conditioning unit groups to be managed by tenant managers.
Total target value
For tenant managers Chapter 3
Monthly target
(1) Check the annual target electric energy value.
Comparison with previous year
Actual electric energy consumption of the previous year
Target value for each block
Annual target
Item
Description
Annual target electric energy
The annual target electric energy consumption value is displayed.
Actual electric energy consumption of the previous year
Comparison with previous year
The electric energy actually consumed in the previous year is displayed.
The ratio of the annual target electric energy of the current year to the electric energy consumed in the previous year is displayed.
Note: If there are results for the previous year, then at the new year, a comparison of the previous year's annual target electric energy and results will be displayed.
WT07996X12
173
(2) Check the target electric energy values for each month.
Monthly target electric energy
Item
Monthly target electric energy
Description
Monthly target electric energy values for the air conditioning units managed by tenant managers are displayed.
(3) Check the target electric energy values for each block.
Annual target electric energy for each block
Block name
Item
Block name
Annual target electric energy for each block
Description The names of all the registered blocks are displayed.
Note: The blocks set for tenant manager management are displayed. Note: If the block name has not been registered, [AE No. + "Block" + Block number] is displayed.
The annual target electric energy values for each block will appear are displayed.
WT07996X12
174
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1-3. Schedule
Schedule function can be used to change the operation status of the air conditioning units automatically at a given time. Weekly (5 types), annual (5 types), and current day scheduling are available. Up to 24 events can be scheduled per day.
Note: When the schedules overlap, schedule with the highest priority will run as shown on the next page. (Today's schedule>Annual schedule>Weekly schedule 1 to 5)
Note: Schedules can be set for each unit group. Note: Set the [Schedule] setting on the operation settings screen for each unit group to [Available] to enable the scheduled events. Note: Schedule settings are based upon the set PC time, however, execution of scheduled tasks uses the time set on the
centralized controller. Ensure that the times set on the PC and on the centralized controller match before configuring settings. Refer to 2-5-3 [1] "Date and Time Settings" in Chapter 2 for details on ensuring these match.
1-3-1. Schedule setting example
SUN MON
34 10 11 17 18 24 25 31
Group 1
Aug
TUE WED THU FRI SAT
12
Group 2 Aug
FRI SAT
56789
12
12 313 4 14 515 6 16 7 8 9
19 1020 1121 1222313234 14 5 15 6 16 7
26 1727 1828 19291020301121 1222 1323 14 24 25 26 1727 1828 1929 2030 21
31
24 25 26 27 28
31
Group 3 Aug
FRI SAT
12 89 15 16 22 23 29 30
Days that Weekly Schedule runs Days that Annual Schedule runs Days that Today's Schedule runs
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Weekly schedule 1
(special)
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Weekly schedule 4
(winter)
Weekly schedule 2 (summer)
Weekly schedule 4
(winter)
Weekly schedule 5 (spring)
Weekly schedule 3 (autumn)
Note: The figure above shows the setting example of weekly schedules where the date period for each Weekly Schedule is set to the followings. Weekly Schedule 1: Aug 1 - Aug 20 Weekly Schedule 2: Jun 16 - Sep 15 Weekly Schedule 3: Sep 16 - Nov 15 Weekly Schedule 4: Nov 16 - Mar 15 Weekly Schedule 5: Mar 16 - Jun 15
Note: When any of the Weekly Schedules 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 overlap, the schedule with the lower number takes priority. For example, Weekly Schedule 1 takes precedence over Weekly Schedule 2.
WT07996X12
175
Today's schedule Schedules can be set for the current day without modifying the weekly or annual schedules.
Annual schedule Different schedules can be set for public holidays or summer vacation.
Weekly schedule 1 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 2 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 3 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 4 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Weekly schedule 5 Schedules can be set for each day of the week.
Priority High Low
WT07996X12
176
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1-3-2. Scheduled Start
[1] AI-Smart Start Schedule To attain the set temperature at the scheduled start time, this function calculates the time required to attain the set temperature, using the past operation data (such as the outside temperature, room temperature, and set temperature) learned by AI and considering daily temperature variation, and performs pre-cooling or pre-heating operation with low power consumption.
Note: The AI-Smart Start Schedule function is usable only for air conditioning unit groups that contain outdoor units to be released in the future.
Note: To fully utilize the AI-Smart Start Schedule function, use it repeatedly for it to learn the operating conditions.
Note: The AI-Smart Start Schedule function learns the operating conditions for cooling and heating separately. Due to this, in the first year of its operation, at the change of the seasons where the operation mode is changed, the function may be unable to attain the set temperature by the scheduled start time.
Note: The AI-Smart Start Schedule function starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation up to 90 minutes before the scheduled start time. (When this function is used for the first time, it starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation 90 minutes before the scheduled start time.)
Note: Air conditioning unit groups that are stopped 90 minutes before the scheduled start time will perform pre-cooling/pre-heating operation. (Air conditioning unit groups that are operating 90 minutes before the scheduled start time will not perform precooling/pre-heating operation.)
Note: During pre-cooling/pre-heating operation, indoor units will operate at the maximum fan speed.
Note: Pre-cooling/pre-heating operation will be stopped by the following: - Changing the ON/OFF status - Changing the operation mode - Changing the set temperature - Changing the fan speed
Note: At the scheduled start time, the indoor units will operate according to the settings (set temperature, operation mode, air direction, and fan speed) set by the schedule setting. When the fan speed has not been set, the units continue operating at the maximum fan speed.
Note: When the remote control operation prohibition setting and the AI-Smart Start Schedule function are enabled at the same time, the remote control operation prohibition setting will be applied after the scheduled start time.
[2] Optimized Start Schedule To attain the set temperature at the scheduled start time, this function calculates the time required to attain the set temperature, based on the past operation data (such as the room temperature and set temperature), and performs pre-cooling or pre-heating operation.
Note: The Optimized Start Schedule function is usable with air conditioning unit groups and groups of LOSSNAY with heater/ humidifier.
Note: The Optimized Start Schedule function starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation up to 60 minutes before the scheduled start time. (When this function is used for the first time, it starts pre-cooling/pre-heating operation 30 minutes before the scheduled start time.)
Note: When the remote control operation prohibition setting and the Optimized Start Schedule function are enabled at the same time, the remote control operation prohibition setting will be applied after the scheduled start time.
[3] Regular Schedule Units start operating at the scheduled start time set by the schedule setting.
WT07996X12
177
Concept of control by AI-Smart Start Schedule and Optimized Start Schedule <Example> Scheduled start time: 8:30, Operation mode: Heating, Set temperature: 20ºC
AI-Smart Start Schedule (example of control)
Optimized Start Schedule (example of control)
Operation status of the outdoor unit
Scheduled start time
Operation status of the outdoor unit
Scheduled start time
Regular operation
Energy-save operation
7:00
7:30
8:00
8:30
Concept of AI-Smart Start
Scheduled start time
20
Pre-heating
operation
Pre-heating
15
operation
starts at 7:20.
10
7:00
7:30
8:00
Regular operation
Set temperature 20ºC
Current room temperature 10ºC
8:30
Regular operation
Regular operation
7:00
7:30
8:00
8:30
Concept of Optimized Start
Scheduled start time
20 15
10 7:00
Pre-heating operation
Pre-heating operation starts at 7:40.
7:30
8:00
Regular operation
Set temperature 20ºC
Current room temperature 10ºC
8:30
<Example> Pre-heating operation starts at 7:20.
<Example> Pre-heating operation starts at 7:40.
Room temperature (ºC) Room temperature (ºC)
WT07996X12
178
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1-3-3. Weekly Schedule
Five types of weekly schedules (Weekly 1 to 5) can be set. Operations can be scheduled for each day of the week for each weekly schedule.
[1] Selecting a target to which the schedule will be applied In the group list, select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied, and click [Schedule settings]. A screen to set a schedule for the selected group(s) will appear. Refer to section 1-1-4 "Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated" for how to select group icons.
Group list
Schedule (HWHP)
Schedule (Chiller)
Schedule settings Schedule (MEHT-CH&HP)
(1) Select [HWHP] to set the schedule for HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) units, select [Chiller] to set the schedule for chiller units, select [MEHT-CH&HP] to set the schedule for MEHT-CH&HP units, or select [Show groups] to set the schedule for other equipment.
(2) Select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied, and click [Schedule settings] in the taskbar.
Schedule settings
(3) If different equipment types exist together, a screen to select an equipment type will appear. Select one of the equipment types to set the schedule.
WT07996X12
179
(4) Select a setting method.
(A) To create a new schedule or to edit an existing schedule, click [Edit schedule contents] and click [OK].
(B) To create a schedule based on the existing setting of other group, select [Create based on other group], select the group whose schedule is to be based on, and click [OK]. The contents of the schedule that have been set for the selected group will appear on the screen that will appear next.
(A) Creating newly or editing Edit schedule contents
(B) Creating based on the setting of other group
Create based on other group
Select the group whose schedule is to be based on.
Note: If the group whose schedule is to be based on has no schedule settings, no contents of the schedule will appear on the screen that will appear next.
WT07996X12
180
For tenant managers Chapter 3
[2] Checking the date range for each schedule Five types of weekly schedule date range settings (Weekly 1 to 5) that have been set on the Integrated Centralized Control Web can be checked.
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click [Weekly schedule].
(2) Clicking [Weekly 15] will display the date ranges in which each weekly schedule will be effective.
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Schedule settings (Month)
Weekly schedule
Weekly 15 Date range
Weekly schedule
Schedule Setting (Week)
Weekly schedule
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Note: Only building managers can configure the weekly schedule date range setting. Tenant managers cannot configure the setting. Note: The date range settings are set for each centralized controller (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50).
[3] Selecting a day of the week Schedules can be set for each day of the week for each weekly schedule (Weekly 1 to 5).
(1) In the Schedule settings screen, select one of the weekly schedule (Weekly 1 to 5).
(2) Click the day to set the schedule. A screen to edit the schedules of the selected weekly schedule and the selected day of the week will appear.
Weekly 15 Select the weekly schedule to set the
schedule.
Weekly schedule
Day of the week The selected day
of the week will appear.
Edit schedule settings
Weekly 15 The selected weekly schedule will appear.
Day-of-the-week selection
Select the day to set the schedule.
WT07996X12
Simplified display The simple schedule contents for each day of the week will appear.
181
Simplified display The simple schedule contents will appear.
Schedule contents
[4] Creating or changing the schedule contents (1) In the Edit schedule settings screen, click [Add] to create a new schedule, or click [Edit] to change an existing schedule. A schedule contents settings screen will appear.
Edit schedule settings
Edit Click to change an existing schedule contents.
Add Click to create a new schedule.
(2) In the schedule contents settings screen, set the start time to apply to the schedule, set the operations to be scheduled, and then click [OK]. If [Optimized Start] or [AI Start] is selected, the operation mode and the set temperature need to be set as well.
Scheduled start time
Schedule contents settings (1/2)
Delete Click to delete the settings.
Schedule contents settings (2/2)
Scheduled start time
Delete Click to delete the settings.
OK
Click to confirm
Cancel
the settings.
Click to undo the changes made
and close the settings screen.
OK
Click to
confirm the
Cancel
settings.
Click to cancel the settings
and close the settings screen.
(3) After all schedule settings are completed, click [OK] on the Edit schedule settings screen.
Schedule settings
Cancel Click to undo the changes
made and close the Edit schedule settings screen.
OK Click to confirm the settings.
Note: When setting a schedule for a block or all groups collectively, all operation modes are available for selection, but the available operation modes depend on the unit model. The units will not operate in the selected mode not supported by the units.
Note: No need to set schedules for all operations. Set one or more necessary operations. Note: The operation items that will appear on the screen vary, depending on the equipment type. Note: For details about settings of each operation, refer to section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings". Note: Refer to section 1-3-2 "Scheduled Start" for details about Optimized Start Schedule function and AI-Smart Start Schedule
function.
WT07996X12
182
[5] Saving the schedules (1) After the schedule settings are completed, click [Send] on the Schedule settings screen to send and save the settings to the centralized controllers. To undo the changes made, click [Cancel].
Schedule settings
Cancel Click to undo the changes made and close the Schedule
settings screen.
Send Click to save the settings.
Note: Clicking [Send] will send the schedule settings to the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). It may take a few minutes to complete the transmission, depending on the volume of the schedule contents.
For tenant managers Chapter 3
WT07996X12
183
1-3-4. Annual Schedule
Schedules can be set for public holidays or summer vacation. Up to five operation patterns (Pattern 1 to 5) can be set for the 24 months including the current month, and total of 50 days can be allocated to the patterns. [1] Selecting a target to which the schedule will be applied
(1) In the group list, select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied. Refer to [1] in 1-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
[2] Selecting a schedule pattern Up to five operation patterns can be set.
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click [Annual schedule pattern].
(2) In the pattern settings screen, select a schedule pattern to set the schedule.
(3) An Edit schedule settings screen will appear.
Schedule Setting (Month)
Pattern settings
Edit schedule settings (Pattern)
Pattern selection Select a pattern to set the schedule.
Schedule contents
Annual schedule pattern
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Simplified display The simple schedule contents for each pattern will appear.
Simplified display The simple schedule contents for each pattern will appear.
Pattern to set the schedule
[3] Creating or changing the schedule contents
(1) In the Edit schedule settings screen, set the start time to apply to the schedule, set the operations to be scheduled, and then click [OK]. Refer to [4] in 1-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
WT07996X12
184
For tenant managers Chapter 3
[4] Allocating schedule patterns to special dates Each schedule pattern can be allocated to the specified dates such as public holidays and summer vacation.
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click the date to set a pattern.
(2) Select the pattern to be allocated to the selected date.
Schedule settings (Month)
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Date Click the date to
set a pattern.
Number of allocated patterns
Pattern selection Select a pattern to set the schedule.
[5] Saving the schedules (1) After the schedule settings are completed, click [Send] on the Schedule settings screen to send and save the settings to the centralized controllers. To undo the changes made, click [Cancel].
Schedule settings
Cancel Click to undo the changes made and close the Schedule
settings screen.
Send Click to save the settings.
Note: Clicking [Send] will send the schedule settings to the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). It may take a few minutes to complete the transmission, depending on the volume of the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
185
1-3-5. Today's Schedule
Schedules can be set for the current day without modifying the weekly or annual schedules.
Note: It is not possible to delete the today's schedule and change it to the weekly or annual schedule.
[1] Selecting a target to which the schedule will be applied
(1) In the group list, select a group icon(s) to which the schedule will be applied. Refer to [1] in 1-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
[2] Setting or changing the contents of the schedule
(1) In the Schedule settings screen (Month or Week display), click the date of the current day. The current day is displayed with a blue frame.
(2) Click [Today's schedule settings].
(3) In the Edit schedule settings screen, set the start time to apply to the schedule, set the operations to be scheduled, and then click [OK]. Refer to [4] in 1-3-3 "Weekly Schedule" for details.
Note: In the Schedule settings screen, "Today" ( schedule is set.
) is displayed on the date of the current day to which Today's
Schedule settings (Month)
Edit schedule settings (Today)
Current day Click the current day.
Display switching Switches between Month and Week.
Today's schedule settings
[3] Saving the schedules (1) After the schedule settings are completed, click [Send] on the Schedule settings screen to send and save the settings to the centralized controllers. To undo the changes made, click [Cancel].
Schedule settings
Today's schedule set
Cancel Click to undo the changes made and close the Schedule
settings screen.
Send Click to save the settings.
Note: Clicking [Send] will send the schedule settings to the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50). It may take a few minutes to complete the transmission, depending on the volume of the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
186
For tenant managers Chapter 3
1-3-6. Copying existing settings, or creating a schedule based on other settings
[1] Copying existing settings of other group The schedule settings can be copied among groups. (1) Air conditioning unit group
(1) In the group list, select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied, and then click [Copy] in the taskbar.
(2) The schedule contents of the selected group will be copied, and the group icon will appear with an orange frame.
(3) Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted, and click [Paste]. The name of the group whose schedule settings have been copied appears under the [Copy] button.
Procedure (1)
Procedure (2)
Procedure (3)
Copy Click to copy the schedule contents of the selected group.
Group icon Select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied.
Copied The group icon
will appear with an orange
frame.
Name of the group whose schedule
settings are copied
Paste Click to paste the
copied settings.
Group icon Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted.
Note: Schedules of a group may not be precisely copied to a different type of group. When the group whose operation mode is set to "Optimized Start" is copied to the outlet air temperature control unit, the operation mode will be "ON."
(2) HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV), chiller unit group, and MEHT-CH&HP unit group
Procedure (1)
Procedure (2)
Procedure (3)
Copy Click to copy the schedule contents of the selected group.
Group icon Select the group whose schedule settings are to be copied.
Copied The group icon
will appear with an orange
frame.
Name of the group whose schedule
settings are copied
Paste Click to paste the
copied settings.
Group icon Select the group to which the copied schedule settings are to be pasted.
Note: Schedules can be copied between CRHV and CAHV unit groups, but cannot be copied between CRHV/CAHV and QAHV unit groups.
Note: Schedules of a QAHV unit group cannot be copied to two or more QAHV unit groups at the same time.
WT07996X12
187
[2] Creating a schedule based on existing settings of other pattern/day of the week When setting annual schedule patterns or setting schedules for each day of the week for weekly schedule, the schedule settings can be created based on existing settings of other pattern or other day of the week.
(1) In the Edit schedule settings screen, click [Based on...].
(2) In the [Based on...] screen, select the pattern or the day of the week whose schedule is to be based on.
(3) The contents of the schedule that have been set for the selected pattern or the day of the week will appear in the Edit schedule settings screen.
(4) Add or change the schedule contents, if necessary.
· Annual schedule Edit schedule settings (pattern settings)
Pattern selection
Edit schedule settings (pattern settings)
Pattern to set the schedule
Based on existing settings of other pattern
· Weekly schedule
Pattern Select the pattern whose schedule is to be
based on.
Schedule contents The contents of the schedule that have
been set for the selected pattern will
appear.
Edit Click to edit the schedule contents.
Add Click to add the schedule contents.
Edit schedule settings (weekly schedule settings)
Edit schedule settings (weekly schedule settings)
Day-of-the-week selection
Day of the week to set the schedule
Based on existing settings of other day of the week
Day of the week Select the day of the week whose schedule is
to be based on.
Schedule contents The contents of the schedule that have
been set for the selected day of the
week will appear.
Edit Click to edit the schedule contents.
Add Click to add the schedule contents.
WT07996X12
188
For general users Chapter 4
Chapter 4. For general users
If logged in with general user privileges, Integrated Centralized Control Web monitoring and operating functions can be used. Log in to display the Monitor/Operation screen. Only general users can use a smartphone for monitoring and operation.
Note: For how to log in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web using a PC, tablet, or smartphone, refer to 3 "Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web" in Chapter 1.
Note: Login processing may require approximately 10 seconds. Also, switching between pages sometimes takes approximately 3 seconds. More time may be required, depending on your communications environment, terminal functionality, and the number of devices in the managed air conditioning unit group.
Note: Consult with the building manager for the ID and password required for login. Note: "Tenant/Personal Web" license is required to use general users.
PC/Tablet Monitor/Operation screen
Login URL: http://[IP address of the login destination centralized controller AE-200/EW-50]/control/index.html
[1] Menu
[2] Operation status of each unit group
[3] Current date and time
Smartphone Monitor/Operation screen Login URL: http://[IP address of the login destination centralized controller AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html
[2] Operation status of each unit group
WT07996X12
189
[1] Menu
Monitor/Operation
Displays a screen to monitor and operate the operation conditions of each unit group.
[2] Operation status of each unit group Display the list of unit groups set for general user management.
Example) Range of management for when general users set for Company A's Administration Dept. and Sales Dept., and Company B's Accounting Dept. and Development Dept.
Air conditioning control system
Integrated Centralized Control Web
Building owner (Building manager)
Company A
Administration Dept. Sales Dept.
(General user A)
(General user B)
Company B
Accounting Dept. (General user C)
Company C
Development Dept. (General user D)
Note: Up to 2,000 general users can be registered on the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Note: General user settings can be configured on the Integrated Centralized Control Web. Refer to section 2-5-2 "User registration"
in Chapter 2 for settings methods. Note: Only the unit groups set for general user management can be monitored and operated.
[3] Current date and time This displays the time of the PC on which Integrated Centralized Control Web is used.
WT07996X12
190
1. Usage (PC, tablet)
This section explains how to monitor and operate the air conditioning units, LOSSNAY units, Air To Water (PWFY) units, HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) units, chiller units, MEHT-CH&HP units, and general equipment that are connected to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
1-1. Monitor/Operation
1-1-1. Screen sequence
Group list
Group list (simple operation)
HWHP/chiller/MEHT-CH&HP list
Advanced settings
HWHP/chiller/MEHT-CH&HP list (simple operation)
Advanced settings
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
191
1-1-2. Group icons
Each group icon indicates the operation condition of the group.
[1] Air conditioning unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Filter sign ON *1 *15
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON *2
Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF *3
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
Energy-saving ON
*4 *10
Setback ON *8
Unit unknown *9
Occupied/Vacant
*5 *6 *15
Bright/Dark
*7 *8 *15
Room temperature display *11 *15 *17
Room humidity display *12 *13 *15
Hold ON *14
(blue)
(gray)
(yellow)
(gray)
(red)
Operation suspended
*16
AI-Smart Start ON*18
(blue)
*1 Whether or not to display the filter sign ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*2 If the LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of Mr. Slim units, "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON" icon will appear, even when the LOSSNAY unit is operated individually. (Applicable M-NET adapter model: PAC-SF48/50/60/70/80/81MA-E)
*3 If a LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in multiple groups, the LOSSNAY unit may be in operation, even when the "Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF" icon is displayed.
*4 The "Energy-saving ON" icon will appear while the energy-save control is performed on the group, or the outdoor unit that is connected to the group. This icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*5 The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon will appear only when the remote controller in the group has an occupancy sensor. (ME remote
controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA)) The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon will appear only when [ ] (blue),
[ ] (gray), or [
] (blue/gray) is selected in the initial settings.
*6 The Occupancy/Vacancy status icon takes priority over the "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON" and "Interlocked LOSSNAY OFF" icons.
*7 The Brightness/Darkness status icon will not appear only when the remote controller in the group has a brightness sensor. (ME remote
controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA)) The Brightness/Darkness status icon will appear only when [ ]
(yellow), [ ] (gray), or [
] (yellow/gray) is selected in the initial settings.
*8 The "Setback ON" icon takes priority over the Brightness/Darkness status icon.
*9 The "Unit unknown" icon will stay when the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 cannot be recognized after startup. Check for proper connection of the air conditioning units and proper group settings.
*10 The "Energy-saving ON" icon takes priority over the "Room temperature display" and "Room humidity display" icons.
*11 Display option of the room temperature ([Always show], [Show during operation], [Hide]) can be set in the initial settings. Even when [Set temp.], [Room temp.(Always)/Set temp.], or [Room temp.(During op.)/Set temp.] is selected in the initial settings, the room temperature will be displayed.
*12 The "Room humidity display" icon will appear only when the remote controller in the group has a humidity sensor. (ME remote controller (North America: PAR-U01MEDU, Europe: PAR-U02MEDA))
*13 Whether or not to display the humidity ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*14 The "Hold ON" icon is displayed for the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not for the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
*15 Initial settings can be configured in the basic settings screen on the Initial Setting Tool or LCD. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
*16 The "Operation suspended" icon appears when an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet ®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function).
*17 The outlet air temperature is displayed for the outlet air temperature control units.
*18 The "AI-Smart Start ON" icon will appear 90 minutes before the scheduled start time and stays on the screen until the scheduled start time. If the room temperature has not reached the set temperature at the scheduled start time, the icon will remain on the screen after the scheduled
start time. The icon will disappear when the set temperature has been reached.
WT07996X12
192
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
ON
OFF
Error
Filter sign ON *1 *6
Schedule set *3
Schedule disabled *3 Energy-saving ON *2 Night Purge ON *3
Hold ON *7
Operation suspended
*8
(blue)
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group and HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
For general users Chapter 4
Energy-saving ON *2
Water temperature display *4
(red)
[4] Chiller unit group
ON
OFF
Hold ON *7
Operation suspended
*8*9
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
[5] MEHT-CH&HP unit group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set
Schedule disabled
[6] Other equipment group
ON
OFF
Error
Schedule set *5 *6
Schedule disabled
Hold ON *7
*1 Whether or not to display the filter sign ([ON], [OFF]) can be set in the initial settings.
*2 The "Energy-saving ON" icon will appear while the energy-save control is performed on the LOSSNAY unit group, group of LOSSNAY with heater/humidifier, or the outdoor unit that is connected to these groups. This icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*3 If Schedule is set during Night Purge operation, then the order of priority for display will be "Night Purge ON" "Schedule set". Even if Schedule is disabled, the order of priority for display will be "Night Purge ON" "Schedule disabled".
*4 The "Water temperature display" icon will not appear for the HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
*5 If any schedule setting is applied to a DIDO controller whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen in the initial settings), the "Schedule set" icon will appear, but the scheduled operations will not be performed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods
*6 Initial settings can be configured in the basic settings screen on the Initial Setting Tool or LCD. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
*7 The "Hold ON" icon is displayed for the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not for the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
*8 The "Operation suspended" icon appears when an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet ®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function).
*9 The "Operation suspended" icon will appear only for the Air To Water (PWFY) unit groups.
Note: Icons can be changed in the group settings screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
193
1-1-3. Monitoring the operation status
This section explains how to monitor the operation status of units.
[1] Air conditioning unit, LOSSNAY unit, Air To Water (PWFY) unit, and other equipment groups Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Show groups] to display the operation status of unit groups.
Controller Click to narrow down the groups
to display.
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Group icon
Room temperature
Room humidity
Set temperature
Operation mode
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode". · Air conditioning unit group
Cool
Dry
Fan
Heat
Auto
Auto (Cool)
Auto (Heat)
Setback
· LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Bypass
Heat Recovery
Auto
· Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
Cooling
Note: In [Controller], it is possible to narrow down the unit groups for group display into "Centralized controller units," "Block units," and "Energy management block units."
Note: The selection screen displays the centralized controllers to which unit groups set for general user management (in section 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2) are connected and the blocks and energy management blocks of unit groups set for general user management.
Note: For how to configure centralized controller name setting, block and energy management block settings, and name settings, refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings).
Note: The group name can be displayed using up to 10 double-byte, or 10 to 18 single-byte characters. The number of characters that can be displayed differs depending on character type. Name setting is carried out through initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
194
Centralized controller selection
Block selection
Energy management block selection
For general users Chapter 4
Centralized controller name
Block name
* Example of narrowing down the range in [Controller]
Energy management block name
1st floor Centralized controller (Centralized controller units)
Company A (Energy mgmt block units)
Administration Dept. (Block units)
Accounting Dept. (Block units)
2nd floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
Sales Dept. (Block units)
Company A Facility (Energy mgmt block units)
3rd floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
No-name block 4 (Energy mgmt block units)
4th floor Expansion controller (Centralized controller units)
WT07996X12
195
[2] HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [HWHP] to display the operation status of HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit groups.
Note: [HWHP] will not appear if no HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) units have been registered to any group. Note: Fan mode will appear only for CAHV units. Brine temperature will appear only for CRHV units.
Controller Click to narrow down the
HWHP unit groups to display.
Group name Group icon
Operation mode
Set temperature
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Fan mode
Temperatures Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode". · HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit group
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
[3] Chiller unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [Chiller] to display the operation status of chiller unit groups.
Note: [Chiller] will not appear if no chiller units have been registered to any group.
Controller Click to narrow down the chiller unit groups to display.
Group name Group icons
Select all Click to select all displayed unit groups at once.
Deselect all Click to cancel all selections at once.
Operation mode
Fan mode
Set temperature
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Cooling
Heating
Heating ECO Anti-freeze
Temperatures Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
WT07996X12
196
[4] MEHT-CH&HP unit group Click [Monitor/Operation] in the menu, and then click [MEHT-CH&HP] to display the operation status of chiller unit groups.
Note: [MEHT-CH&HP] will not appear if no MEHT-CH&HP units have been registered to any group.
Controller Click to narrow down the MEHT-CH&HP unit groups
to display.
Group name Group icons Operation mode
Set temperature
Temperatures (Manager3000) Representative inlet water temperature, representative outlet water temperature, outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed. (Temperatures are detected by the representative unit.)
The operation mode currently in use is displayed in "Operation mode".
Cooling
Heating
Temperatures (W3000) Outdoor temperature, inlet water temperature, and outlet water temperature are displayed.
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
197
1-1-4. Selecting the icons of the groups to be operated
In the group list, select the icon(s) of the group(s) to be operated as explained below. [1] Selecting group icons (1) Selecting unit group(s) that are managed by general users
(1) In the group list, click the icon(s) of the group(s) you want to operate. The selected group icon(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Group selection
Deselect all
Close
(2) Selecting all unit groups that are managed by general users (1) In the group list, click [Select all]. The all icon(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Select all Deselect all
Close
WT07996X12
198
For general users Chapter 4
(3) Selecting all groups under the control of a given controller connected to the unit groups that are managed by general users
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the controller selection screen, select a centralized controller. The unit groups that are under the control of the selected centralized controller will appear. In the group list (centralized controller units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Controller
Group list
Controller selection Groups of the selected controller Select all
Deselect all
Close
(4) Selecting all groups in a given block that are managed by general users
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the block selection screen, select a block. The unit groups that belong to the selected block will appear. In the group list (block units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Block selection
Groups of the selected block
Select all
Controller
Deselect all
Close
(5) Selecting all groups in a given energy management block that are managed by general users
(1) In the group list, click [Controller]. In the block selection screen, select an energy management block. The unit groups that belong to the selected energy management block will appear. In the group list (energy management block units), click [Select all]. All icons will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Group list
Block selection
Groups of the selected energy management block
Select all
Controller
Deselect all
Close
WT07996X12
199
[2] Selecting equipment type (1) When the equipment types of all selected groups are the same
Selecting the group icons to operate and clicking [Advanced] in the taskbar will bring up the operation settings screen for the selected groups. Refer to section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" for details about the advanced settings.
Selecting groups of the same equipment
type
Taskbar
Advanced settings
Note: [ON] and [OFF] operations can be performed on the taskbar for the selected unit groups.
(2) When the equipment types of the selected groups are different
Selecting the group icons to operate will bring up the equipment type selection options in the taskbar. Select an equipment type, and click [Operations] to display the operation settings screen. Refer to section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" for details about the advanced settings.
Taskbar
Operations Click to operate all groups of the selected equipment type at once.
Note: When two or more equipment types are selected, only the [ON/OFF] and [Schedule] settings can be configured. Note: [Other equipment] in the taskbar indicates general equipment.
WT07996X12
200
[3] Selecting HWHP (CAHV, CRHV), chiller unit, and MEHT-CH&HP unit groups (1) Selecting HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit groups
(1) In the HWHP screen, click the group you want to operate. The selected HWHP unit group will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect.
Deselect all Select all
Close
(2) Selecting chiller unit groups (1) In the Chiller screen, click the group(s) you want to operate. The selected chiller unit group(s) will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Deselect all] or [Close] in the taskbar.
Deselect all Select all
For general users Chapter 4
Close
WT07996X12
201
(3) Selecting MEHT-CH&HP unit groups (1) In the MEHT-CH&HP screen, click the group you want to operate. The selected MEHT-CH&HP unit group will appear with a checkmark and a dark blue frame. Click again to deselect. To cancel all group selections, click [Close] in the taskbar.
Close
WT07996X12
202
1-1-5. Advanced settings
In the group list, selecting the group icon(s) and clicking [Advanced] in the taskbar will bring up the operation settings screen for the selected group(s). The current operation status will appear. Change necessary operation settings, and then click [Send] to reflect the changes. Click [Close] to return to the previous screen without making any changes.
Note: When the setting is changed from other controllers, the operation status shown on the screen will not be updated while the screen is open.
[1] Air conditioning unit group
Set temperature Operation prohibition
mark
Group name
-Centrally ControlledAir Direction
ON/OFF
Operation mode
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Fan Speed
Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Filter Sign Reset Click to reset the filter sign.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
For general users Chapter 4
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Air Direction Fan Speed
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Click the desired operation mode. [Cool], [Dry], [Fan], [Heat], [Auto], [Setback]
Select an operation mode.
Note: When the operation mode signals from the cooling/heating switchover model of units are mixed (Cool and Heat), the operation mode will not change and the selected operation mode will blink.
Note: The Setback mode can be selected on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Depending on settings values resulting from restrictions by device functions and set temperature range restriction functions, temperature settings ranges may be restricted.
Note: For the same indoor unit, when changing operation mode and set temperature from multiple operation devices (system controllers, remote controllers), display of outside the allowable settings range may occur.
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
Note: Depending on the unit model, setting in 0.5°C units and 1°C units is possible.
Note: If the indoor unit supports the dual-set-point function in the Auto mode and when the operation mode above is set to Auto or Setback, two set temperatures for Cool mode and Heat mode can be set.
Note: When the indoor units that support the dual-set-point function and the indoor units that do not support the dual-set-point function exist in the same group, only one set temperature can be set in the Auto mode.
Note: Set the outlet air temperature for the outlet air temperature control units.
Note: The set temperature is not displayed when the operation group contains both free-plan units and outlet air temperature control units.
Adjust the air direction with the
Auto
Swing
buttons.
Adjust the fan speed
Auto
with the
buttons.
WT07996X12
203
Item Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY
Filter Sign Reset
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Select [High] or [Low].
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Switches the fan speed of the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Resets the filter sign. (The cumulative time will be reset.) When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter. Note: After the filter sign is reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display
on the local remote controllers.
Operation prohibition mark
Send
Display only Click [Send].
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
prohibited.
is displayed when one or more operation items are
Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Close
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
* After [Send] is clicked, it takes a while for the status of the LOSSNAY unit group icons to be updated. * If a LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in multiple groups, the LOSSNAY unit may be in operation, even when
the LOSSNAY unit is displayed as "stopped".
WT07996X12
204
Note: When the indoor units support a dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set for the Auto mode. When this function is used, indoor units automatically switch over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures. The graph below shows an example of operation patterns of units operated in the dual-set-point mode.
Set temp. (Cool)
Operation patterns in the dual-set-point mode
Room temperature fluctuates in response to changes in outdoor temperature.
Set temp. (Heat)
Heat
Cool
Heat
Room temp.
Cool
Automatically switches over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures.
If the indoor units of the selected unit group support the dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set.
(1) Temperature setting for a group in which all indoor units support dual-set-point mode
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
For general users Chapter 4
(2) Temperature setting for when the groups that support the dual-set-point mode and the groups that do not are selected together
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
WT07996X12
205
Set temperature (singleset-point) for groups that do not support the dualset-point mode
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Operation prohibition mark
Group name
-Centrally ControlledFan Speed
ON/OFF
Ventilation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Humidify
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Filter Sign Reset Click to reset the filter sign.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF
Ventilation mode
Fan Speed
Humidify
Filter Sign Reset
Operation prohibition mark
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Turns on or off the units.
Select [ON] or [OFF].
Note: If the units are turned off during the Night Purge operation, the Night Purge
operation will not be performed until the next day.
Select a ventilation mode.
Click the desired ventilation mode. [Bypass], [Heat Recovery], [Auto]
Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Auto
Adjust the fan speed with the
buttons.
Note: During the Night Purge operation, the fan speed can be adjusted but
will
not be displayed.
Select [ON], [OFF], or [Auto].
Switches the operation status of the humidification function. Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the filter sign. (The cumulative time will be reset.) When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Note: Reset the filter sign after cleaning the filter.
Note: After the filter sign is reset, it takes up to an hour to clear the filter sign display on the local remote controllers.
Display only
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
prohibited.
is displayed when one or more operation items are
Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
206
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Operation prohibition mark Group name ON/OFF
-Centrally ControlledSet temperature
Operation mode
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Operation prohibition mark
Send Close
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Heating], [Heating ECO], [Hot Water], [Anti-freeze], [Cooling]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Display only
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
prohibited.
is displayed when one or more operation items are
Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
207
[4] HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) unit group
Operation prohibition mark
Group name
-Centrally ControlledSet temperature
ON/OFF
-Centrally Controlled-
Operation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any
changes.
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Error Reset
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode Set temperature
Error Reset
Fan Mode
Operation prohibition mark
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Heating], [Heating ECO], [Hot Water], [Anti-freeze]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Reset] and click [Send].
Resets the error. When resetting, ensure the check mark is displayed as " ".
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Note: The fan mode for CRHV units cannot be operated.
Display only
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
prohibited.
is displayed when one or more operation items are
Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
208
For general users Chapter 4
[5] Chiller unit group
Group name ON/OFF
-Centrally ControlledSet temperature
Operation mode
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Fan Mode
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Fan Mode
Operation prohibition mark
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Cooling], [Heating], [Heating ECO], [Anti-freeze]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Select [Normal] or [Snow].
The fan can be set to keep rotating even while the unit is stopped to avoid snow accumulation on the fan guard during the winter. Select [Normal] to stop the fan while the unit is stopped. Select [Snow] to operate the fan even while the unit is stopped.
Display only
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
prohibited.
is displayed when one or more operation items are
Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
209
[6] MEHT-CH&HP unit group
Group name ON/OFF
Operation mode
Set temperature
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Item ON/OFF Operation mode
Set temperature
Send Close
Operation method
Description
Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Select an operation Click the desired operation mode.
mode.
[Cooling], [Heating]
Adjust the set temperature with
the buttons.
The settable temperature ranges depend on the operation mode and the unit model.
Click [Send].
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list.
Click [Close].
Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
WT07996X12
210
[7] Other equipment group
Operation prohibition mark Group name ON/OFF
Close Click to close the settings screen without making any changes.
Send Click to reflect the changes made.
Item
ON/OFF Operation prohibition mark Send Close
Operation method Select [ON] or [OFF]. Turns on or off the units.
Description
Display only
Click [Send]. Click [Close].
Operation prohibition mark is displayed when the operation is prohibited from the local remote controllers.
Click to reflect the changes made and return to the group list. Click to return to the group list without making any changes.
Note: General equipment whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen
in the initial settings) cannot be operated and an operation prohibition mark is displayed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
211
1-1-6. Operation suspension function
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function), the operation control status will be indicated with an icon and a message. While this indicator is displayed, the status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON]. [1] Group list
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear and all the units in the group will stop or remain stopped.
[2] Quick access on the task bar When a group is selected whose operation is under suspension, its operation status will appear as [OFF], and this status cannot be changed from the task bar.
Operation suspended
[3] Advanced settings screen When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear next to the [ON/OFF] button and next to the [ON/OFF] button under "Prohibit Remote Controller Operation." While this icon is displayed, the operation status cannot be changed. The type of operation suspension function will appear in the top center of the window.
ON/OFF OFF will be highlighted while the group is under operation suspension.
"Operation suspended" icon
Type of operation suspension function (Emergency stop or Energy-save)
Item ON/OFF
"Operation suspended" icon
Description
The operation status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON] while the group is under operation suspension.
The icon [ ] appears while the group is under operation suspension.
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building
management system (BACnet®), [
] will appear.
While the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function,
[
] will appear.
WT07996X12
212
2. Usage (Smartphone)
This section explains how to monitor and operate the air conditioning units, LOSSNAY units, Air To Water (PWFY) units, and general equipment that are connected to the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
Login URL: http://[IP address of the login destination centralized controller AE-200/EW-50]/mobile/index.html
Note: Be sure to use a smartphone in portrait mode.
2-1. Monitoring the operation status
This section explains how to monitor the operation status of all groups collectively (see section 2-1-1 "Checking the operation status"). After login, the group list will appear, which shows the operation conditions of all air conditioning unit groups, LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) groups, Air To Water (PWFY) unit groups, and general equipment groups.
Note: HWHP (CAHV, CRHV) units, chiller units, and MEHT-CH&HP units cannot be operated on a smartphone.
2-1-1. Checking the operation status
In the group list, the operation status of all groups can be monitored. The operator can also check the unit malfunctions in this list and prevent the units from being left on unintentionally.
<Group list>
Login user name
Batch operation Click to operate all groups at once.
Operation status of each group
Advanced settings Click to display an operation settings screen.
For general users Chapter 4
<Operation status of each group>
Group icon
Operation mode Status display
WT07996X12
213
Group name
2-1-2. Group icons
Each group icon indicates the operation condition of the group.
Unit
ON/OFF
Error
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF
Air conditioning unit group
Unit unknown
Operation suspended
LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
General equipment group
Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Note: Icons can be changed in the group settings screen in the initial settings. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
2-1-3. Operation mode
The operation mode of each group currently in use is displayed.
Unit
Cool
Dry
Fan
Heat
Air conditioning unit group
Auto
Auto
Cool
Heat
Setback
Unit
LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Bypass
Heat Recovery
Auto
Unit
Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Heating
Heating ECO
Hot Water
Anti-freeze
Cooling
WT07996X12
214
2-1-4. Status display
The setting information and operation status of each group are displayed by icons.
Icon
Description
Set temperature (Cool/Heat)
Room temperature *1
Humidity
Night Purge ON
Setback ON
Energy saving control Occupied/Vacant Bright/Dark
Filter sign ON
Schedule disabled
Schedule set
AI-Smart Start ON
Hold ON
Status display skipped *1 The outlet air temperature is displayed for the outlet air temperature control units.
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
215
2-2. Operation
This section explains how to operate each group (see section 2-2-1 "Operating the units") and all groups collectively (see section 2-2-2 "Operating the units in all groups").
2-2-1. Operating the units
In the group list, click [Advanced settings] to switch to the operation settings screen, which shows the current operation status in the "Operation items" and "Other operation status information" areas. Change the desired operation items and touch [Send] to reflect the changes. Touch [Cancel] to return to the group list without sending any changes.
Cancel
Group name
Advanced settings Status display
Operation items
Note: The "Other operation status information" area shows the group icon and the operation status (excluding the room temperature or the set temperature) that are displayed in status display area in the group list.
Other operation status information
[1] Air conditioning unit group Operation settings screen for air conditioning unit groups is as follows. If Interlocked LOSSNAY (ventilator) is set, then under the air conditioning unit group operating items will be displayed the interlocked LOSSNAY operating items.
Cancel ON/OFF Operation mode Set temperature Air Direction
Send
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF
Interlocked LOSSNAY Fan
Speed Other operation status information
Fan Speed Filter Sign Reset
Operation prohibition mark
WT07996X12
216
Item ON/OFF
Description Touch [ON] or [OFF] to turn on or off the units.
Note: Switching this setting will turn on or off the LOSSNAY unit as well that is interlocked with the operation of indoor units in the group. To turn on or off the LOSSNAY unit only, use the "Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/OFF" switch.
Touch to display the operation mode selection screen, and select the desired operation mode.
Touch to return to the operation settings screen.
For general users Chapter 4
Operation mode
Set temperature Air Direction
Note: When the operation mode signals from the cooling/heating switchover model of units are mixed (Cool and Heat), the operation mode will not change and the selected operation mode will blink.
Note: The Setback mode can be selected on the AE-200A/AE-50A/EW-50A, but not on the AE-200E/AE-50E/EW-50E.
Touch or to change the set temperature. Depending on settings values resulting from restrictions by device functions and set temperature range restriction functions, temperature settings ranges may be restricted.
Note: Depending on the unit model, setting in 0.5°C units and 1°C units is possible. Note: If the indoor unit supports the dual-set-point function and when the operation mode above is set to
Auto or Setback, two set temperatures for Cool mode and Heat mode can be set. Note: Set the outlet air temperature for the outlet air temperature control units.
Touch or to adjust the air direction.
Auto
Swing
Touch or to adjust the fan speed.
Auto
Fan Speed
Filter Sign Reset
Interlocked LOSSNAY ON/ OFF
Fan speed of interlocked LOSSNAY Other operation status information
Click to switch between resetting and not resetting the filter sign. To reset, display a checkmark ( ).
Note: If a filter sign in the group has not been triggered, then this item will not appear. Touch [ON] or [OFF] to turn on or off the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator).
Note: For a group that is not connected to an interlocked LOSSNAY unit (ventilator), this item will not appear.
Touch or to adjust the fan speed of the interlocked LOSSNAY units (ventilator). Note: For a group that is not connected to an interlocked LOSSNAY unit (ventilator), this item will not appear.
Operation status other than the operation items will appear.
WT07996X12
217
Item
Operation prohibition mark
Description
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
is displayed when one or more operation items are prohibited. Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Send
Touch to reflect the changes and return to the group list.
Cancel
Touch to return to the group list without sending any changes.
Note: When the indoor units support a dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set for the Auto mode. When this function is used, indoor units automatically switch over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures. The graph below shows an example of operation patterns of units operated in the dual-set-point mode.
Set temp. (Cool)
Operation patterns in the dual-set-point mode
Room temperature fluctuates in response to changes in outdoor temperature.
Room temp.
Set temp. (Heat)
Heat
Cool
Heat
Cool
Automatically switches over between cooling and heating, based on the room temperature, to maintain the room temperature within the two predetermined temperatures.
If the indoor units of the selected unit group support the dual-set-point function, two different set temperatures (one for cooling and the other for heating) can be set.
(1) Temperature setting for a group in which all indoor units support dual-set-point mode
Set temperature for cooling Set temperature for heating
WT07996X12
218
(2) Temperature setting for when the groups that support the dual-set-point mode and the groups that do not are selected together
Set temperature for cooling
Set temperature for heating
Set temperature (single-set-point) for groups that do not support the dual-set-
point mode
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
219
[2] LOSSNAY unit (ventilator) group
Cancel ON/OFF Ventilation mode Fan Speed
Send Operation prohibition mark
Humidify Filter Sign Reset Other operation status information
Item ON/OFF
Description Touch [ON] or [OFF] to turn on or off the units.
Note: If the units are turned off during the Night Purge operation, the Night Purge operation will not be performed until the next day.
Touch to display the ventilation mode selection screen, and select the desired ventilation mode.
Touch to return to the operation settings screen.
Ventilation mode
Fan Speed
Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation. Touch or to adjust the fan speed.
Auto
Humidify
Filter Sign Reset
Other operation status information
Operation prohibition mark
Note: During the Night Purge operation, the fan speed can be adjusted but
will not be displayed.
Touch [ON], [OFF], or [Auto] to switch the operation status of the humidification function.
Note: This item will not appear during the Night Purge operation.
Click to switch between resetting and not resetting the filter sign. To reset, display a checkmark ( ).
Note: If a filter sign in the group has not been triggered, then this item will not appear.
Operation status other than the operation items will appear.
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
is displayed when one or more operation items are prohibited.
Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
WT07996X12
220
Item
Description
Send Cancel
Touch Touch
to reflect the changes and return to the group list. to return to the group list without sending any changes.
[3] Air To Water (PWFY) unit group
Cancel ON/OFF
Send Operation prohibition mark
Operation mode
Set temperature
Other operation status information
Item ON/OFF
Description Touch [ON] or [OFF] to turn on or off the units. Touch to display the operation mode selection screen, and select the desired operation mode. Touch to return to the operation settings screen.
Operation mode
For general users Chapter 4
Set temperature Other operation status information
Operation prohibition mark
Send Cancel
Touch or to change the set temperature.
Operation status other than the operation items will appear.
Operation prohibition mark is displayed on the operation items that are prohibited from the local remote controllers.
is displayed when one or more operation items are prohibited. Note: The operation prohibition setting can be made by a building manager and tenant managers.
Touch to reflect the changes and return to the group list.
Touch to return to the group list without sending any changes.
WT07996X12
221
[4] General equipment group
Cancel ON/OFF
Send Operation prohibition mark
Other operation status information
Item
ON/OFF Other operation status information
Operation prohibition mark
Description Touch [ON] or [OFF] to turn on or off the units.
Operation status other than the operation items will appear.
Operation prohibition mark is displayed when the operation is prohibited from the local remote controllers.
Send
Touch to reflect the changes and return to the group list.
Cancel
Touch to return to the group list without sending any changes.
Note: General equipment whose prohibition setting is enabled ("Allow operations" is set to [No operations] on the group settings screen
in the initial settings) cannot be operated and an operation prohibition mark is displayed. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for settings methods.
WT07996X12
222
2-2-2. Operating the units in all groups
(1) In the group list, touch [Batch operation]. If different equipment types exist together in a system, a screen to select an equipment type will appear. Touch [Advanced settings] of an equipment type of the groups to collectively change their settings.
(2) In the operation settings screen, change the required settings and touch [Send] to reflect the changes. Click [Cancel] to return to the previous screen without making any changes.
Batch operation Click to operate all groups at once.
Advanced settings
Cancel
Send
Note: For groups that have set temperature ranges limit, then the range of temperatures that can be set is restricted.
Note: If there are groups for which some items cannot be operated within the corresponding group, then sending these items to that group is not possible.
Note: The set temperature is not displayed when the operation group contains both free-plan units and outlet air temperature control units.
For general users Chapter 4
WT07996X12
223
2-2-3. Operation suspension function
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building management system (BACnet®) or while the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function), the operation control status will be indicated with an icon and a message. While this indicator is displayed, the status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON].
[1] Group list
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear and all the units in the group will stop or remain stopped.
[2] Advanced settings screen
When a given group of air conditioning units has made an emergency stop or is stopped under Peak Cut control, the icon [ ] will appear next to the [ON/OFF] button. While this icon is displayed, the operation status cannot be changed. The type of operation suspension function will appear in the top center of the window.
ON/OFF OFF will be highlighted while the group
is under operation suspension.
"Operation suspended" icon
Type of operation suspension function (Emergency stop or Energy-save)
Item ON/OFF
"Operation suspended" icon
Description
The operation status cannot be changed from [OFF] to [ON] while the group is under operation suspension.
The icon [ ] appears while the group is under operation suspension.
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from the building
management system (BACnet®), [
] will appear.
While the 30-minute operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function,
[
] will appear.
WT07996X12
224
Chapter 5. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
This section shows the troubleshooting for when using Integrated Centralized Control Web.
No.
Phenomenon
I wish to use HTTPS (SSL).
1
Check of cause
The layout in Integrated
· The software version of
Centralized Control Web is AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 was
2 broken. Or, the buttons do updated.
not work.
· The settings were changed
using Initial Setting Tool.
The login screen is not displayed.
· The URL entered in the browser is incorrect.
Corrective action · Register a certificate to the PC, tablet, or
smartphone you are using.
Refer to 1 "HTTPS (SSL) connection". · Delete the history of the browser you are using.
Refer to 2 "When the layout is broken".
· Check that the IP address of the AE-200/EW-50 that is the login destination for Integrated Centralized Control Web is correct.
· Check the setting using Initial Setting Tool.
Refer to 3-1 "Checking the login destination IP address".
3
· The software versions of
· Contact your dealer or a manufacturer-specified
AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 are not service company.
the same.
Refer to 3-2 "Mismatched software versions".
· The settings for the Integrated Centralized Control Web have not been made.
· Configure the settings from the Initial Setting Tool.
Refer to 3-3 "When the settings for the Integrated Centralized Control Web have not been made".
The air conditioning units · An error occurred in
that can be monitored and communication with
operated are not displayed. AE-200/AE-50/EW-50.
4
· The integrated centralized control settings are incorrect.
· Check whether the LAN connection is connected correctly.
· Monitor the settings using Initial Setting Tool and check that the centralized controllers target for control are set correctly.
Refer to 4 "Air conditioning units that can be monitored and operated are not displayed".
Integrated Centralized
Control Web is displayed
5 with the bottom part cut off
on a tablet.
· Place Integrated Centralized Control Web on the Home screen and start it from the Home screen.
Refer to 5 "Screen displayed with bottom part cut off on a tablet".
When the Integrated
· An error occurred in
Centralized Control Web
communication with the
is accessed, the message login destination centralized
6 "Failed to connect to the
controller.
centralized controller."
appears, and no login
window appears.
· Check whether the LAN connection is connected correctly.
When the Integrated
· More than 50 users are
Centralized Control Web
accessing the Integrated
is logged in, the message Centralized Control Web.
7
"The connection to the login destination centralized
controller is busy." appears,
and the login process
cannot be completed. *1
· Reduce the number of users that are accessing the Integrated Centralized Control Web to 50 or less.
An error appears on the air · The centralized controller is still · The startup process will be completed in a while,
conditioning unit.
starting up.
and the normal icon will appear.
* It takes approximately 5 minutes to complete the startup
8
process.
* If the problem persists, check for proper connection
between the air conditioning unit and the centralized
controller, and proper settings for the air conditioning unit
group settings.
*1 When Internet Explorer is used, this message will not appear, but the message "Failed to connect to the centralized controller." will appear.
WT07996X12
225
No.
Phenomenon
Check of cause
Corrective action
Logging in takes several minutes.
9
· There is a device on the same network as the AE-200/AE-50/ EW-50 that is monopolizing the communication bandwidth.
· Software on the PC, tablet, or smartphone is monopolizing the communication bandwidth.
· Consult the system administrator. · Close the software that is in operation.
When the Integrated
Centralized Control Web
is accessed, the message
"Failed to connect to the
10
login destination centralized controller. Check for
proper connection of the
centralized controller."
appears, and no login
window appears.
· Check the settings of the security software. · Check to see if your PC or tablet meets the system
requirements. Refer to 1-4 "Operating environment" in Chapter 1.
The CSV file of the energy · Microsoft Office 2007 or earlier · Import the CSV file on the PC with Microsoft Office
11
management data cannot be properly imported to the
is installed on the PC.
2010 or later installed.
PC.
The result of the gas refrigerant amount check turns out "Unmeasurable."
12
· The gas refrigerant amount may not be properly checked if one or more conditions below are met.
1) Outdoor temperature is outside the range between 0ºC and 40ºC.
2) During the heating operation 3) Initial startup mode is not
completed. 4) Right after the outdoor unit is
stopped 5) During the emergency
operation
· The gas refrigerant amount cannot be properly measured if one or more conditions 1) through 5) are met.
· When manually checking the gas refrigerant amount, make sure to avoid these conditions, and leave the power to the outdoor unit turned off for at least three minutes before checking. To automatically check the gas refrigerant amount, schedule the check to run while the outdoor unit is stopped.
The message "Failed to
· The screen is left in one of the · Do not leave the screen in the states 1)-4) that are
connect to the centralized following states for 10 minutes described in the Cause column.
controller....Check for
or longer on the browser
· Use a web browser other than Internet Explorer 11.
proper connection of the
(Internet Explorer 11).
centralized controller."
1) The right-click menu is left
13
appears, then the message displayed on the screen. "The connection is timed 2) The Internet options window
out...." appears, and the
is left displayed on the screen.
program is logged out.
3) The Print window is left
displayed on the screen.
4) The Properties window is left
displayed on the screen.
The message "The
The computer has been
connection is timed out...."
on sleep for 10 minutes or
14
appears, and the program is logged out.
longer. A different tab has been
opened on the Microsoft
Edge browser for a while.
Disable the sleep function. See section 2-4 "Setting the computer to be used
for monitoring" in Chapter 1.
Disable the sleeping tabs function of Microsoft Edge. See section 2-4 "Setting the computer to be
used for monitoring" in Chapter 1.
I forgot my administrative 15 login user name and
password.
· Contact your dealer or your sales office.
Centralized controller
Communication error with
Make sure the LAN is properly connected. If the
communication error
the centralized controller to
error display does not disappear under normal
appears on the unit in error
which you are logged in.
LAN connection, re-log in from the log-in window.
on the notification screen. The software versions of
Contact your dealer or a service provider that is
16
AE-200, AE-50, and EW-50
designated by the manufacturer. Refer to Section
do not match.
3 "Login screen does not open".
The centralized controller is The error will be reset when the startup process
in the process of starting up.
is completed. (The startup process will last for
approximately 5 minutes.)
WT07996X12
226
1. HTTPS (SSL) connection
This unit can encrypt the transmission data using the HTTPS (SSL) protocol. When connecting this unit to a LAN that is accessed by an unspecified number of people, you can configure the following settings to enable status monitoring and control of equipment using encrypted webpages.
1-1. When using a Windows PC
(1) Register the certificates of all the centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50) to be controlled by Integrated Centralized Control Web to the PC that will be used.
Enter the following webpage address in the address bar of the Web browser. Enter http://(IP address of AE-200, AE-50, or EW-50)/cacert.cer and then press the [Enter] key.
Example: http://192.168.1.1/cacert.cer
Note: Integrated Centralized Control Web integrates multiple centralized controllers (AE-200/AE-50/EW-50) to monitor and operate the air conditioning units. When the HTTPS (SSL) protocol will be used, the certificates for the multiple centralized controllers to be integrated need to be registered to the PC.
AE-200
Certificate registration
Integrated Centralized Control Web
EW-50
EW-50
Note: "Centralized controller network error" will be displayed under "Notice" on the Integrated Centralized Control Web when the certificate is not registered for the centralized controller. When this message is displayed, the air conditioning units managed by the centralized controller cannot be monitored and operated.
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
227
(2) Click and execute the downloaded file "cacert.cer".
Note: Depending on the browser used, the downloaded file may not be displayed on the task bar. In these cases, run the file "cacert.cer" from the download folder.
(3) The "Open File" window will appear. Click [Open].
(4) When the Certificate Information screen appears, click [Install Certificate...].
WT07996X12
228
(5) When the Certificate Import Wizard screen appears, click [Next].
(6) When the Certificate Store screen appears, select [Place all certificates in the following store], click [Browse], select [Trusted Root Certification Authorities], click [OK], and click [Next].
(7) When the Completing the Certificate Import Wizard screen appears, click [Finish].
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
229
(8) When the certificate installation confirmation screen appears, click [Yes].
(9) The certificate import process begins. When the import completion message appears, click [OK].
Note: The certificate is valid from April 1, 2014, to January 1, 2051. Set the date and time of the PC so that they are within the validity period.
(10) Repeat steps (1) to (9) to register the certificates of all the centralized controllers (AE-200/EW-50) to be controlled by Integrated Centralized Control Web to the PC.
(11) Log in from Integrated Centralized Control Web. Enter the following webpage address in the address bar of the Web browser. https://(IP address of login destination AE-200/EW-50)/control/index.html
Note: Use Initial Setting Tool to configure the settings of the login destination AE-200/EW-50. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
WT07996X12
230
1-2. When using an iOS device (Safari)
(1) Start Safari and then enter the following webpage address in the address bar. Enter http://(IP address of AE-200, AE-50, or EW-50)/cacert.cer and then touch the [Go] button. Example: http://192.168.1.1/cacert.cer
(2) When the Install Profile screen pops up, touch the [Install] button.
(3) When the Warning screen pops up, touch the [Install] button.
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
231
(4) When the Profile Installed screen pops up, touch the [Done] button.
(5) Open [Settings] > [General] > [Profile], and check the registered certificates.
Registered certificates Check that all certificates for the centralized controllers to be controlled by Integrated Centralized Control Web are installed.
(6) Log in from Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Enter the following webpage address in the address bar of the Web browser. Tablet: https://(IP address of AE-200/EW-50)/control/index.html Smartphone: https://(IP address of AE-200/EW-50)/mobile/index.html
WT07996X12
232
1-3. When using an Android device (Chrome)
(1) Start Chrome and then enter the following webpage address in the address bar. Enter http://(IP address of AE-200, AE-50, or EW-50)/cacert.cer and then touch the [Go] button.
(2) The certificate is downloaded to the device. Swipe at the top of the display of the device to display the notification menu and check that the file "cacert.cer" has been downloaded.
(3) Open [Settings] > [PERSONAL] > [Security], touch [Install from storage], and touch [OK] to register the downloaded file "cacert.cer".
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
233
(4) Open [Settings] > [PERSONAL] > [Security], click [Trusted credentials], and check the registered certificates.
Registered certificates Check that all certificates for the centralized controllers to be controlled by Integrated Centralized Control Web are installed.
(5) Log in from Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Enter the following webpage address in the address bar of the Web browser. Tablet: https://(IP address of AE-200/EW-50)/control/index.html Smartphone: https://(IP address of AE-200/EW-50)/mobile/index.html
WT07996X12
234
2. When the layout is broken
When the software version of the centralized controllers connected to Integrated Centralized Control Web is updated or the settings are changed using Initial Setting Tool, the layout of Integrated Centralized Control Web may break and its operation buttons may no longer work. If that happens, use the following procedure to clear the history data of the browser.
2-1. When using a Windows PC (Chrome)
(1) Open the settings of Chrome and then click [Show advanced settings...].
Settings
(2) Click [Clear browsing data...] under [Privacy] in the advanced settings.
Show advanced settings...
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
235
(3) Select "the beginning of time", check the checkboxes next to "Cookies and other site and plugin data" and "Cashed images and files", and click "Clear browsing data".
2-2. When using an iOS device (Safari)
(1) Open the settings and then touch [Safari] to open the Safari settings. Touch [Clear Cookies and Data] to clear the browser cache.
2-3. When using an Android device (Chrome)
(1) Open [Settings] of Chrome and then open the [Privacy] settings. Touch [CLEAR BROWSING DATA]. In the Clear browsing data screen, check the checkboxes next to "Cache" and "Cookies, site data," and then touch [CLEAR] to clear the history data of the browser.
WT07996X12
Settings
CLEAR BROWSING DATA
236
CLEAR
3. Login screen does not open
3-1. Checking the login destination IP address
If the login screen of Integrated Centralized Control Web does not open, check the following setting using Initial Setting Tool.
Note: To use Integrated Centralized Control Web, you need to configure the settings using Initial Setting Tool.
Important Check that the IP address of the AE-200/EW-50 that is the login destination for Integrated Centralized Control Web is correct.
(1) Click [Basic Settings] > [System Configuration] in Initial Setting Tool to open the System Configuration settings screen.
(2) Enter the IP addresses of all the centralized controllers that are control targets of Integrated Centralized Control Web and then click [Save].
(3) Click [Acquire data] from the [Data acquisition] menu to acquire the information on the air conditioning cooling and heating integrated centralized control system.
(4) Click [Floor Settings] > [Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web] to open the Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web settings.
(5) Check the number of the centralized controller displayed in "Target centralized controller."
(6) In the System Configuration screen, check the IP address of the centralized controller set for the checked number of "Target centralized controller."
(7) Check that it matches the login destination IP address displayed as the URL of the browser.
System Configuration settings
Floor settings for Integrated Centralized Control Web
Acquire
data
Check the destination IP address for the AE-200 of the number checked in . (In this figure, 192.168.1.1 is
the destination IP address.)
Check the number of the centralized controller displayed in "Target centralized controller". (In this
figure, 1 is the number.)
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
237
3-2. Mismatched software versions
The software versions of the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 managed by the Integrated Centralized Control Web must all be the same. Contact your dealer or a manufacturer-specified service company.
Note: If these are different, a screen indicating that the software versions are different will first be displayed, and log in will not be possible.
Login destination centralized controller
(Ver. 7.31)
Mismatched version's centralized controller
(Ver. 7.23)
3-3. When the settings for the Integrated Centralized Control Web have not been made
In AE-200/EW-50 software Ver. 7.3, if Integrated Centralized Control Web settings using Initial Setting Tool is not performed, the login screen will be displayed in duplicate. Use the Initial Setting Tool to perform Integrated Centralized Control Web settings, and then connect.
Note: The Integrated Centralized Control Web can be used from AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 software Ver. 7.3 and later. Note: In AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 software Ver. 7.4 and later, even if Integrated Centralized Control Web settings using Initial Setting
Tool is not performed, the login screen will be displayed, and login will be possible. In these cases, only the air conditioning unit groups that are managed by the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 to which you are logged in can be monitored and operated. Note: On the AE-200/AE-50/EW-50 software version earlier than 7.90, when logging in as a general user on the Web browser (http: //(IP address of the AE-200/EW-50 to be logged in)/mobile/index.html) from your smartphone, the settings data had to be sent from the Initial Setting Tool. Although it is not necessary to send the settings data on version 7.90 and later, general user ID and password need to be registered beforehand. Log in as an administrator from your computer or tablet PC to register them.
WT07996X12
238
4. Air conditioning units that can be monitored and operated are not displayed
4-1. Communication error occurred
If an error occurs in communication with a centralized controller that is a control target of Integrated Centralized Control Web, the air conditioning units connected to the centralized controller with which the communication error occurred are not displayed in Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Target (login destination) centralized controller
Communication error!
Management target centralized controller
Not displayed in Integrated Centralized Control Web when a communication error is occurring.
Important
The centralized controller error will be displayed under [Notice] when you log in as an building manager. Check the connection of the centralized controller with which the communication error occurred.
Note: While a communication error is occurring for a login destination centralized controller, you will not be able to use Integrated Centralized Control Web.
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
239
4-2. Integrated Centralized Control settings are not set correctly
Monitoring and operation using Integrated Centralized Control Web are not possible for a centralized controller whose integrated centralized control settings have not been configured using Initial Setting Tool.
Important Check that the centralized controllers that are control targets of Integrated Centralized Control Web are registered correctly
using Initial Setting Tool. Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings) for details.
(1) Click [Basic Settings] > [System Configuration] in Initial Setting Tool to open the System Configuration settings screen.
(2) Enter the IP addresses of all the centralized controllers that are control targets of Integrated Centralized Control Web and then click [Save].
(3) Click [Acquire data] from the [Data acquisition] menu to acquire the information on the air conditioning cooling and heating integrated centralized control system.
(4) Click [Floor Settings] > [Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web] to open the Floor for Integrated Centralized Control Web settings.
(5) Check the centralized controllers displayed in "Managed centralized controller."
* Any centralized controller without a check mark is not a control target of Integrated Centralized Control Web.
System Configuration settings
Floor settings for Integrated Centralized Control Web
Acquire data
Managed centralized controllers
WT07996X12
240
5. Screen displayed with bottom part cut off on a tablet
If you log in to Integrated Centralized Control Web from a bookmark of the Safari or Chrome browser when using a tablet, the bottom part of the monitoring and operation screen may be cut off. If that happens, place a shortcut icon of Integrated Centralized Control Web on the Home screen and use Integrated Centralized Control Web by starting it with the shortcut icon.
[Safari]
[Chrome]
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
Screen displayed with simple operation taskbar cut off
<When iOS is used> (1) Start Safari and connect to Integrated Centralized Control Web. (2) Touch the [Action] icon. (3) Touch [Add to Home Screen] to add a shortcut icon to the Home screen. (4) Start Integrated Centralized Control Web from the shortcut icon.
WT07996X12
Shortcut icon 241
<When Android is used> (1) Start Chrome and connect to Integrated Centralized Control Web. (2) Touch [Settings]. (3) Touch [Add to Home Screen] to add a shortcut icon to the Home screen. (4) Start Integrated Centralized Control Web from the shortcut icon.
(5) Start Integrated Centralized Control Web from the shortcut icon. [Safari]
Shortcut icon [Chrome]
WT07996X12
242
Appendix: Added functions
The table below summarizes the newly added functions.
Version Ver. 7.40
Ver. 7.46
Menu item Monitor/Operation
Monitor/Operation
Added function The temperature to be displayed on the Floor Layout screen can be switched between room temperature and set temperature. The setting can be switched in the initial settings.
Errors are notified with a buzzer sound and a popup message.
When an emergency stop signal is received through an external contact or from BACnet® or while the operation suspension is executed by the Peak Cut function (energy-save control function), the status can be indicated. The cumulative filter usage time can be reset for the air conditioning unit groups whose filters were not replaced or cleaned.
HWHP (QAHV) units can be monitored and operated.
Reference
Section 2-1 "Monitoring/ Operation" in Chapter 2
Section 1 "Home screen" [7] "Error notification" in Chapter 2
Section 2-1-7 "Operation suspension function" in Chapter 2
Section 2-1-6 "Resetting the cumulative filter usage time" in Chapter 2
Section 2-1-5 "Advanced settings" [4] "HWHP (QAHV, CAHV, CRHV) unit group" in Chapter 2
Section 2-1-5 "Advanced settings" [5] "Chiller unit group" in Chapter 2
Ver. 7.5 Monitor/Operation Chiller units can be monitored and operated.
Section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" [5] "Chiller unit group" in Chapter 3
Ver. 7.6 Ver. 7.68
Gas Refrigerant Amount Check
Monitor/Operation
Section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" [5] "Chiller unit group" in Chapter 4
Room temperature and the set temperature can both be displayed on the Floor layout screen simultaneously. The setting can be switched in the initial settings.
Section 2-1-3 "Monitoring the operation status" [2] "Floor Layout display" in Chapter 2
The gas refrigerant amount check can be automatically
Section 2-8-3 "Gas
performed according to the specified schedule, and the check log Refrigerant Amount
data can be output in a CSV format.
Check" in Chapter 2
MEHT-CH&HP units can be monitored and operated.
Section 2-1-5 "Advanced settings" [6] "MEHTCH&HP unit group" in Chapter 2 Section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" [6] "MEHTCH&HP unit group" in Chapter 3 Section 1-1-5 "Advanced settings" [6] "MEHTCH&HP unit group" in Chapter 4
Troubleshooting Chapter 5
WT07996X12
243
Version
Menu item
Added function
Reference
Chapter 2 Section 2-1 "Monitoring/ Operation" Section 2-3 "Schedule" Section 2-8 "Maintenance"
Monitor/Operation
The outlet air temperature control units can be monitored and operated.
Chapter 3 Section 1-1 "Monitor/ Operation" Section 1-3 "Schedule"
Ver. 7.7
Ver. 7.8 Ver. 7.9
Screen display settings
Function
Ventilation Settings
Home screen or Monitor/Operation screen can be selected to display right after the log in.
The following settings can be made. · E-Mail · Peak Cut · Set Temperature Range Limit · Night Mode (quiet operation) Schedule · System-changeover · External Temperature Interlock · Night Setback Control
Night purge setting can be made.
Monitor/Operation
EACV/EAHV series P1500 (50HP)/P1800 (60HP) can be monitored and operated.
Supported browser
Microsoft® Edge® was added.
AI-Smart Start
Time required for pre-cooling and pre-heating can be calculated by AI.
Learning data created based on past data can be reset.
Chapter 4 Section 1-1 "Monitor/ Operation" Section 2-1 "Monitoring the operation status" Section 2-2 "Operation" Section 2-5-1 "Screen display settings" in Chapter 2
Refer to the Instruction Book (Initial Settings).
Section 2-1-3 "Monitoring the operation status" [5] "Chiller unit group" in Chapter 2 Section 1-4 "Operating environment" in Chapter 1 Section 2-3 "Schedule" in Chapter 2 Section 1-3 "Schedule" in Chapter 3 Section 2-8-6 "Initialize Learning Data for AISmart Start" in Chapter 2
Login Ver. 7.98
Windows 11® compatible
The product information on the login window can be displayed. The default password of the building manager for the Integrated Centralized Control Web can be changed.
The default password for the maintenance user can be changed.
A computer with Windows® 11 is compatible for use.
Section 3 "Logging in to the Integrated Centralized Control Web" in Chapter 1
Section 2-5-2 "User registration" in Chapter 2
Section 2-8-4 "CSV Output" in Chapter 2
Section 1-4 "Operating environment" in Chapter 1
WT07996X12
244
This product is designed and intended for use in the residential, commercial and light-industrial environment.
The product at hand is based on the following EU regulations: · Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU · Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU
Please be sure to put the contact address/telephone number on this manual before handing it to the customer.
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN MANUFACTURER: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Air-conditioning & Refrigeration Systems Works
5-66, Tebira 6 Chome, Wakayama-city, 640-8686, Japan
WT07996X12
 |
Mitsubishi Electric Centralized Air Conditioner Control - User Web Browser Manual This user manual provides instructions for monitoring and operating Mitsubishi Electric AE-200, AE-50, and EW-50 series centralized air conditioning control units via a web browser. It covers PC requirements, operating system and browser settings, and Java configurations for optimal use. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric Centralized Controller AE-200/AE-50 Installation Manual Installation manual for Mitsubishi Electric's AE-200A/AE-50A and AE-200E/AE-50E centralized air conditioning control systems. Covers safety precautions, specifications, system configuration, installation, wiring, initial settings, and maintenance. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric PAC-YG86TK-J Mounting Kit Installation Manual This installation manual provides detailed instructions for mounting the Mitsubishi Electric Air Conditioning Control System Optional Parts, specifically the PAC-YG86TK-J Mounting Kit for control panels. It covers safety precautions, parts list, external dimensions, installation site selection, mounting procedures for DIN rail and wall-surface installation, and wiring connections. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric Centralized Controller BACnet® Trial Run Tool Instruction Book This document provides instructions for performing a simulated trial run of Mitsubishi Electric's centralized air conditioning controllers (AE-C400/EW-C50, AE-200/AE-50/EW-50) using the BACnet® Trial Run Tool. It covers preparation, installation, network settings, initial configuration, and detailed procedures for simulated trial runs of various system objects. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRF Zoning Systems Catalog Explore the Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Zoning Systems catalog, featuring advanced HVAC solutions for efficient cooling and heating, detailed product specifications, and innovative control options for commercial and light commercial applications. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric City Multi VRF Modbus Interface Manual User manual for Mitsubishi Electric City Multi VRF Modbus interface modules (ME-AC-MBS-50, ME-AC-MBS-100) providing installation, configuration, and technical specifications for integrating VRF systems with Modbus networks. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRF Air Conditioning Systems Explore the advanced features and benefits of Mitsubishi Electric's CITY MULTI Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) air conditioning systems, designed for energy efficiency, comfort, and versatile applications in various buildings. |
 |
Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRF Systems Catalog Explore the Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRF systems catalog, featuring advanced HVAC solutions for residential and commercial applications. Discover high-performance, modular VRF systems with inverter-driven technology, complete zoning control, and quiet operation. |